ANCED DICTIONARY

ADVANCED
ADV
OF
MATHEMATICS FORMULAS
ADVANCED DICTIONARY
OF

MATHEMATICS FORMULAS
No part of this publication can be reproduced, stored
in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise without the prior permission
of the author and the publisher.

Rajesh Kumar Thakur Published by

Ocean Books (P) Ltd.
4/19 Asaf Ali Road,
New Delhi-110 002 (INDIA)
Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas
by Rajesh Kumar Thakur

Ocean Books Pvt. Ltd.

ISO 9001:2008 Publishers
 Dedicated
To
My Grandfather
Late Vishnu Deo Thakur
 PREFACE
PREFACE

ikewise a true companion, this books will serve the need of

L a student studying in class 5 onwards till the age of his

entering in the field of engineering arena.
This is a must keep book for every students as it tackles each
and every need of a student. Besides definition, many topics has
been elaborated in such a way that student gets the taste of
inspection of different types of sums and methods to solve them.
I have tried to incorporate each and every chapters in detailed
from CBSE, ICSE and State Boards. The language wherever used
is simple and easy to understand. The syllabus of IIT, AIEEE and
Engineering entrance examination is the additional beauty of this
book.
I am very hopeful that students studying in class 6 to 12 in
different boards all over India and aspiring engineers will like this
book.
In completing this book my younger brother Mr. Rajeev
Ranjan, my friend Mr. Ravinder Sharma and blessing of Dr.
Chandramauli Joshi, the Chairman All India Ramanujan National
Maths Club Gujarat made big support.
I am looking forward to the young readers for their valuable
suggestions to make this book more useful for subsequent editions.

Rajesh Kumar Thakur

E-mail : [email protected]
Phone : 9868060804
 Chapter Pages
«Differentiation—Important Results, Function by
Function, Logarithmic, Parametric, Implicit and
Partial Differentiaton « Rolle’s and Lagrange’s
CONTENTS Theorem «Tangents and Normal «Maxima and
Minima «Increasing and Decreasing Function «Rate
Measure «Application of Derivatives in Commerce.
Preface (v)
5. INTEGRAL CALCULUS 113-130
Chapter Pages
«Basic Formulae «Rule to Solve Integration of
1. ALGEBRA 13-49 Specific Types «Integration by Parts «Reduction
« Different Types of Number « Fundamental Formulae «Definite Integration «Products and
Theorem of Algebra « Terminating and Non- Quotient of Trigonometric Function «Partial Fraction
terminating Decimals «Division Algorithm «Factor «Area «Curve Tracing.
and Remainder Theorem «Polynomials «Linear
6. DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION 133-136
Equation of Two Variables «Quadratic Equation
«Introduction «Solution of Different Differential
« Progression—AP, GP, HP « Permutation and
Equations.
Combination «Binomial Theorem «Logarithmic and
Exponential Function « Inequalities 7. THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY 137-150
« Determinants—Cramer ’s Rule « Matrices «Basic Concept About 3-D «Direction Ratios and
«Radicals. Consines «Straight Line «Planes «Sphere.
2. ARITHMETIC 50-75 8. CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY 151-173
« Divisibility Test « HCF, LCM « Fractions «Quadrant «Sign Scheme of quadrants «Distance
«Simplification «Algebriac Identities «Square and Formula, Section Formula and Area of Triangle
Square Root «Cube «Percentage «Profit and Loss «Straight Lines «Pair of Straight Line «Conic
«Ratio and Proportion «Distance, Time and Speed Section—Parabola, Hyperbola and Ellipse.
«Mensuration «Interest—SI and CI «Alligation or
Mixture «Annuity. 9. LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM 174-179
«Introduction «Formulations of LPP «Corner Point
3. BASIC GEOMETRY 76-94 Method «ISO-Cost Method.
«Euclids’ Axiom and Postulates «Important Points
About Lines, Angles and Triangles «Parallel Lines 10. VECTOR ANALYSIS 180-192
«Polygons «Important Theorems on Geometry. « Important Points About Vector « Collinearity
«Coplanarity of Vectors «Scalar Product «Vector
4. DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 95-112 Product «Scalar Triple Product «Vector Triple
« Limit « Continuity and Differentiability Product.
Chapter Pages Chapter Pages
11. BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 193-200 Onto «Domain, Co-Domain and Range of Function
«Introduction «Principle of Duality «Conditional and «Periodic Function «Important functions and Their
Bi-Conditional Statement «Construction of Circuit Graphical representation «Relation.
«Gates (AND/OR/NOT) «Mathematical Reasoning.
17. TRIGONOMETRY 259-277
12. STATICS 201-210 «Introduction «Measurement of Angles «System
«Basic Points to Remember «Law of Parallelogram of Units to Measure Angle «Measurement of Angles
of Forces «Triangle Law of Forces «Law of Polygon in Different Quadrant «Periodicity and Extreme
of Forces « Lami’s Theorem « λ-µ Theorem Values «Trigonometric Result on Sum/Difference of
« Perpendicular Triangle Forces « Resultant of Angles «Half-Angle Formula «Inverse Circular
Parallel Forces «Moment. Function « Properties of Triangle « Hyperbolic
Function.
13. DYNAMICS 211-215
«Uniform Velocity «Angular Velocity «Triangle APPENDIX 278-287
Law of Velocities «Parallelogram Law of Velocities « Mathematical Symbols « Roman Numerals
«Uniform Acceleration «Vertical Motion Under «Conversion of Unit «Log Table «Antilog Table
Gravity «Projectile «Law of Motion. «Area Under Normal Distribution Table.
14. STATISTICS 217-237 BIBLIOGRAPHY 288
«Mean—AM, Different Methods (Short-Cut, Step-
Deviation) «Weighted Mean «Median of Grouped
and Ungrouped Datas « Median of continuous
Distribution « Quartile « Percentile and Decile
«Mode «Standard Deviation «Skewness «Moment
«Kurtosis «Correlation and Regression «Index
Number « Graph-Bar, Histogram, Frequency
Polygon, Pie-Chart and Ogive.
15. PROBABILITY 238-245
«Important Definition and Result «Different Types
of Probability Distributions—Binomial; Poisson and
Normal «Baye’s Theorem «Random Variable.
16. SET THEORY 246-258
«Set «Kind of Sets «Algebra of Sets «Venn-
Diagram «Cartesian Product of Two Sets «Function
«Types of Function—One-One, Many-One, Into and
 14 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Even Number: An integer that is divisible by 2 is called even

number.
Example: {0, 2, 4, 6, ….}
An even number can be written in the form of 2n, where n is
an integer.
Odd Number: An integer that is not evenly divisible by 2 is
called an odd number.
Al-Khwarazmi
(Father of Algebra) It can be expressed in the form of 2n + 1 where n is an integer.
(780-850) Example: {1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ….}
The sum of n odd number is equal to n2
CHAPTER - 1 i.e. 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 …. upto n terms = n2
Integer: All counting numbers, together with their negatives
ALGEBRA and zero constitute the set of integers. It is denoted by Z.
Example: Z = {–5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ….}
1.1 Definition of Different Number System Rational Number: The number in the form of
p
, where p
Number: A number is an idea which answers the question, q
“How many objects in a collection?” and q are integers is a rational number. It is denoted by Q.
TYPES OF NUMBER p 
Q =  : a , b ∈ z and q ≠ 0
Natural Number: Counting Number are called Natural q 
number. Every integer is a rational number because each integer (m)
e.g., N = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5….}
m
The set of natural number is denoted by N.This set is infinite can be written as . The set of rational number include
and it begins with 1 and the next number is obtained by adding 1 1
to it. The sum of n Natural is given by 4 7
2, –2, , 0, etc.
n(n + 1) 7 4
1 + 2 + 3 + …… + n = Irrational Number: Any real number that is not rational is
2 called Irrational number. In simple word, any real number that is
Whole Number: It is the set of number which include 0 and not expressable as an integer or quotient of integers is Irrational.
counting numbers. It is denoted by W.
W = {0, 1, 2, 3, ….} Example: 2, 3, 5, ….
The first whole number is 0 and the set W has infinite Real Number: The set of Rational and Irrational numbers is
members. the set of real number. It is denoted by R.
Algebra 15 16 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Since denominator is not in 2m × 5n form so it is an example

 3 
Example: R = …., 2, 2, − 1, 0, ,…. of non-terminating repeating decimals.
 4 
Complex Number: Any number real or imaginary in the form 1.4 Division Algorithm
of a + ib is called complex number. If f(x) is a polynomial and q(x) is a non zero polynomial, then
Example: 2 + 3i, –3 + 4i, –4 – 5i …. etc. there exist two polynomials q(x) and r(x) such that
The ‘i’ is called iota and is equal to −1. f(x) = g(x) × q(x) + r(x)
Prime Number: An integer p which is not 0 or ±1 and is where r(x) < g(x)
divisible by no integer except and itself is called prime number. or r(x) = 0
Example: 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19, 23, 29, 31 …. etc. 1.5 Euclid Division Lemma
1.2 Fundamental Theorem of Algebra For given positive integers a and b there exist whole numbers
Every composite number can be expressed as the product of q and r satisfying
primes and this factorisation is unique except for the order in which a = bq + r; 0≤r≤b
prime factor occurs.
b) a (q
Example: 120 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 2 × 5 = 23 × 31 × 51
r
1.3 Terminating and Non-terminating Decimal where q = quotient and r = remainder.
p
(a) For x = be a rational number such that the prime 1.6 Remainder Theorem
q
Let p(x) be a polynomial of degree greater than or equal to
factorization of q is of the form 2m × 5n where m and n are non-
one and let ‘a’ be any real number. If p(x) is divided by linear
negative integers then x has a terminating decimal expansion.
polynomial x – a then the remainder is p(a).
p Example: Find the remainder when x2 + 2x + 3 is divided by
(b) For x = be a rational number such that the prime
q x + 2?
factorization of q is not in the form of 2m × 5n, where, m and n are Let p(x) = x2 + 2x + 3
non-negative integers then x has non-terminating repeating decimal
Put x + 2 = 0 ⇒ x = –2
expansion.
3
Hence p(–2) = (–2)2 + 2(–2) + 3
1 1 1 5
Example: (a) = 3 = 3 3 × 53 = =4–4+3
8 2 2 ×5 (2 × 5)3
=3
It is a terminating decimal as denominator is expressable in
Therefore, Remainder = 3
2n × 5m.
1 1 1.7 Factor Theorem
(b) = 1 1
6 2 ×3 For the given polynomial p(x), if x – a gives p(a) = 0, then
Algebra 17 18 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

x – a is a factor of that polynomial. polynomial.

Example: x + 2 is a factor of p(x) = x2 + 4x + 4 Example: 4x2 + 2x3 – 7x2 + 6x + 5
(v) A polynomial of degree 5 is called Quantic polynomial.
1.8 Polynomial
Example: 5x5 + 3x4 – 2x3 + 4x2 + 7x – 6
Let x be a variable and n be a positive integer. If a1, a2, a3
…… an be constants then On the Basis of Terms
f(x) = anxn + an–1 xn–1 + …. + a2x2 + a1x1 + a0x0 (i) Monomial: A polynomial having a single term
is called a polynomial in variable x, where a1, a2, a3, …… an are Example: 3x , 4y etc.
known as the coefficients. The exponent of the highest degree term (ii) Binomial: A polynomial having two terms
in a polynomial is known as its degree. Example: 2x + 3, 3x + 2y etc.
(iii) Trinomial: A polynomial having three terms
Classification of Polynomials
Example: 3x + 4y + 2, x + y + z etc.
1.9 Linear Equation of One Variable
Any equation 2x + 3 =0, ax + b = 0 etc. are the example of
linear equation in one variable. The graphs of such equation is
On the basis of degree On the basis of terms always a straight line.
y

* On the basis of degree 2

x+y=2
1
x' x
0 1 2
……
Linear Cubic Quantic
Quadratic Biquadric y'

(i) A polynomial of degree 1 is called Linear. (a) Graph of x + y = 2.

Example: 2x + 3 y

(ii) A polynomial of degree 2 is called Quadratic

polynomial.
Example: x2 + 3x + 4 x'
O x=a
x

(iii) A polynomial of degree 3 is called Cubic polynomial.

Example: 3x3 – 11x + 6x – 6 y'
(iv) A polynomial of degree 4 is called Biquadric
(b) Graph of x = a is parallel to y-axis.
Algebra 19 20 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

y a1 b1 c1
(c) If = ≠
a2 b2 c2
y=b The linear represented by the equations are parallel and the
system has no solution.
x' x
O Graphical Representation
y

y'
x' x
(c) Graph of y = b is parallel to x-axis. O
2.0 Linear Equation of Two Variable
Any equation which involves two variables (x, y, z, ….) is
known as Linear equation of two variables. y'
(a) Graph of Equations having unique solution.
Example: 2x + 3y + 4 = 0 y
Two equations each having the two variables may be termed
as Simultaneous equations.
Example: a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
x' x
and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 O

Nature of Solution of Linear Equation of Two Variable

For the system of equations
y'
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 (b) Graph of Equations having no solution.
and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 y

a1 b1
(a) If ≠
a2 b2
The system of equation has consistent with unique solution. x' x
O
a1 b1 c1
(b) If = =
a2 b2 c2
The system of equations has consistent with infinite many y'
solution. (c) Graph of Equations having infinite solution.
Algebra 21 22 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Cross Multiplication Method If D < 0 roots are imaginary.

The solution of the following system of equations can also be
obtained by cross-multiplication rule. If D = 0 roots are real and equal.
For the given system of equations 2.2. Graph of Quadratic Equation
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
Case 1: When polynomial ax2 + bx + c is factorizable into
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
two distinct linear factors.
b1c2 - b2c1 a2 c1 - a1c2
x= and y = y
a1b2 - a2b1 a1b2 - a2b1
or
x y 1 f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, a > 0
= =
b1c2 − b2c1 a2 c1 − a1c2 a1b2 − a2b1
A B
x y 1 x' x
⇒ = = O
b1 c1 c1 a1 a1 b1
–b –D
b2 c2 c2 a2 a2 b2 2a , 4a

2.1 Quadratic Equation y'

l General Form: ax2 + bx + c where (a ≠ 0)
The Curve cuts x-axis at two distinct points A and B . The co-
l The roots of quadratic equations are
ordinate of the Vertex of this parabola is (–b/2a, D/4a) where D =
−b + b 2 − 4ac −b − b 2 − 4ac b2 – 4ac.
x= and
2a 2a
y
where D = b2 – 4ac is called the discriminant.
–b ,D
l If we denote the roots of equations by α and β then 2a 4a

−b
Sum of Roots (α + β) =
a x' x
Product of Roots (αβ) = c/a
f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, a < 0
l The quadratic equation (when two roots are given)
= x2 – (Sum of Roots)x + Product of Roots = 0
= x2 – (α + β)x + αβ = 0 y'
l Nature of Roots:
Case 2: When polynomial ax2 + bx + c is factoriable into two
If D > 0, roots are real and unequal. equal factors.
Algebra 23 24 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

y
f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, a > 0

x' x
O
–b , –D
x' x 2a 4a
(–b/2a, 0)

y'

y'
f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, a < 0
y
In this case, the graph of polynomial does not cut or touch
x-axis.
–b
2a
,0 2.2 Symmetric Functions of the Roots
O x f (x) = an2 + bx + c, a < o
x' If α and β are the roots of ax2 + bx + c = 0. Then
α + β = –b/a
and α + β = c/a
y' ⇒ α2 + β2 = (α + β)2 – 2αβ
b 2 − 2ac
=
In this case, the graphs of polynomial ax2 + bx + c touches a2
x-axis at (–b/2a, 0).
Case 3: When the polynomial ax2 + bx + c is not factoriable. b 2 − 4ac b 2 − 4ac
and α – β = (α + β) 2 − 4αβ = =
a2 a

y f(x) = ax2 + bx + c, a > 0 −b b 2 − 4ac

* α 2 – β2 = ×
a a

−b(b 2 − 3ac)
(–b/2a, –D/4a) * α3 + β3 =
x' x a3

2.3 Transformation of Equations

Let α, β be the roots of the equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 …(1)
y' To find the equation whose roots are—
Algebra 25 26 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(a) Negative, i.e., −α and −β This is possible if either both the factor are positive or both
This is effected by putting y = −α = –x are negative.
or x = –y in equation (1) i.e. x > b or x < a
⇒ ay2 – by + c = 0 Case 2: If (x – a)(x – b) < 0
or ax2 – bx + c = 0 is the required equation This is possible only if one factor is positive and the other is
negative.
1 1
(b) Reciprocal roots i.e. and Hence a<x<b
α β
1 1 2.5 Common Roots
This is effected by putting y = =
α x If α is a common roots of the quadratic equation
1 a1x2 + b1x + c1 = 0 and a2x2 + b2x + c2 = 0
or x= in (1)
y Then
⇒ cy2 + by + a = 0 is the required equation. b1c2 − b2 c1 c1a2 − c2 a1
α= =
(c) Square of the roots i.e. α2 and β2 c1a2 − a1c2 a1b2 − a2b1
This is effected by putting y = α2 = x2
3. PROGRESSION
or x= y in (1)
⇒ a2y2 + (2ac – b2)y + c2 = 0 is the required equation. 3.1 Arithmetic Progression (A.P.)
(d) Cube of the roots i.e. α3 and β3 If the difference between two consecutive numbers throughout
the series is equal.
This is effected by putting y = α3 = x3
1 Example: (a) 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, ……
or x = y 3 in equation (1)
(b) 3, 8, 13, 18, 23, ……
Hence,
(c) a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d, a + 4d, ……
a3y3 + (b3 – 3abc)y + c3 = 0 is the required equation.
The first term is denoted by ‘a’ and the common difference is
(e) When the roots are increased by h i.e. α + h and β + h
‘d’. The last term or nth term is denoted by tn.
This is effected by putting y = α + h = x + h
tn = a + (n – 1)d
or by putting x = y – h in equation (1) n
Hence, Sum to n term = Sn = [ 2a + (n − 1)d ]
2
ay2 + y(b – 2ah) + (ah2 – bh + c) = 0 is the required equation. n
= [ a + tn ]
2
2.4 Sign of the Expression (x – a) (x – b) when a < b
Case I: If (x – a)(x – b) > 0
3.2. Arithmetic Mean
If a, b, c are in A.P. then
Algebra 27 28 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l nth term of a G.P. = tn = arn – 1

a+c
b= is the arithmetic mean between a and c.
2 a ( r n − 1)
l Sum of a n terms of a G.P. = Sn = if r > 1
r −1
3.3 Some Important Notes
l a – d, a and a + d are three terms in A.P. a (1 − r n )
= if r < 1
l a – 3d, a – d, a + d and a + 3d are four terms in A.P. 1− r
l a – 2d, a – d, a, a + d, a, a + 2d are five terms in A.P. a
l Sum to infinite terms of a G.P. =
l a – 5d, a – 3d, a – d, a + d, a + 3d, a + 5d are the six terms 1− r
in AP. l If a, b, c are in G.P.
l Any term of an A.P. (except the first) is equal to half the b2 = ac
sum of terms which are equidistant from it.
⇒ b = ac
1 Here b is called the Geometric Mean between a and c.
[a
i.e. an = + a n + 1]
2 n–1 l Odd numbers of terms in G.P.
l If Sn = Sum to n terms
a a a
tn = Sn – Sn – 1 ... ar3, ar2, ar, a, , , , ……
r r 2 r3
l If in an A.P.
Even Number of terms in G.P.
First term = a
a a a
Last term = b , , , ……
..., ar5, ar3, ar, a,
r r3 r5
nth term (tn) form beginning = a + (n – 1)d l If a1, a2, a3, …… and b1, b2, b3, …… be two G.P.s of
nth term (tn) from end = b – (n – 1)d common ratio r1 and r2 respectively then
3.4 Geometric Progression (G.P.) (a) a1b1, a2b2, a3b3, …… and
l A series in which the ratio of successive terms is constant a1 a2 a3
(b) , , , …… will form a G.P. where common ratio
is called a Geometric Progression. The first term is denoted b1 b2 b3
by ‘a’ and common ratio by ‘r’ r
will be r1r2 and 1 respectively.
Second term Third term r2
r= =
First term Second term l If a1, a2, a3, …… be in G.P. then log a1, log a2, log a3, ……
l Example: 1, 4, 16, 64 …… will be an A.P.
First term = 1 3.5 Arithmetico Geometric Series
4 16 64 l A series in which each term is the product of the
Ratio = = = = …… = 4
1 4 16 corresponding terms of an A.P. and a G.P.
Algebra 29 30 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Example: a + (a + d)r + (a + 2d)r2 + (a + 3d)r3…… (i) A.M. > G.M. > H.M.
Here, a, a + d, a + 2d, a + 3d, …… are in A.P. whereas 1, (ii) A.M. × H.M. = (G.M.)2
r, r2, r3, …… are in G.P.
4. PERMUTATION AND COMBINATION
a dr (1 − r n −1 ) [a + (n − 1) d ]r n
l Sn = + − 4.1. General Concept about Permutation
1− r (1 − r ) 2 1− r
l Permutation: Each of the different arrangements which
a dr can be made taking some or all of a number of things is
l S∞ = +
1 − r (1 − r )2 called a permutation.
l Sum to n terms of l Fundamental Theorem: If there are m ways of doing a
job and there are n associated ways of doing a second job
n (n +1)
l 1 + 2 + 3 + …… + n = =∑n then total number of ways of doing the job will be m × n.
2
Example: If there are three ways to reach from A to B and
n(n + 1)(2n + 1) 2 ways to reach B to C. Then the number of ways to go
l 12 + 22 + 32 + …… + n2 = = ∑n2 from A to C = 3 × 2 = 6.
6
n 2 (n + 1)2
l 13 + 23 + 33 + …… + n3 = = ∑n3 A B C
4

3.6 Harmonic Progression l Number of permutations of n different things taken r things

l If a, b, c, …… are in A.P. at a time = npr
1 1 1 where p represents permutation.
, , , …… are in H.P.
a b c n!
l np =
1 1 1 1
r n − r!
l − = − = d. n! is read as factorial n and it is equal to
b a c b
n! = n(n – 1)(n – 2) …… 3.2.1.
2 1 1
⇒ = + np
b a c
l n = n! = Number of permutation of n dissimilar things
taken all at a time.
2 a+c
= l 0! = 1
b ac
l If out of n things p are exactly alike of one kind q exactly
2ac alike of second kind and r exactly alike of third kind and
⇒b= is the Harmonic Mean the rest are all different, then, the number of permutations
a+c
n!
l Relation between A.M., G.M. and H.M.: of n things taken all at a time = .
p !q !r !
Algebra 31 32 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Number of ways of filling objects, if repetation is not l Numbr of combination of n dissimilar things taken r at a
allowed— time = ncr
n
n n–1 n–2 …… 2 1 n! pr
l nc = =
= n × (n – 1) × (n × 2) × …… × 2 × 1
r
r !n − r ! r!
l Number of combinations of n dissimilar things taken all
l Number of ways to fill r places in n ways when repetation
is allowed— n! 1
at a time = ncn = = =1
n ! ⋅ n − n ! 0!
= n × n × n × …… r times
l Number of combinations of n dissimilar things taken r at
= nr
a time when p particular things always occur = n – pcr – p
l Number of ways to arrange n person in a row =
l Number of combinations of n dissimilar things taken r at
n × (n – 1) × …… × 2 × 1 = n! a time when p particular things never occur = n – pcr
l Circular Permutation: Number of A l Number of permutations of n dissimilar things taken r at a
circular permutation of n different time when p particular thing always occur = n – pcr – p.r!
things taken all at a time = (n – 1)!
l Number of permutations of n dissimilar thing taken r at a
ways.
time when p particular thing never occurs = n – pcr.r!
l Necklace Arrangement B C l Number of ways in which m + n things can be divided
into two groups containing m and n things respectively =
Red Red (m + n)!
m! × n!
l For m = n,
Blue 2m!
Green Blue the number of above subdivision =
m!m!2!
4.3 Gap Method
Green
Suppose you have to make a sitting arrangement of 3 ladies
Number of arrangements of n beads, all different to form
and 5 gents so that the ladies do not sit together, then you will use
1 gap method.
a necklace = (n – 1)!
2 Let us suppose 5 males A, B, C, D, E are arranged in a row
as—
4.2 General Concept About Combination
*A*B*C*D*E*
l Combination: Each of different groups or selection which
can be made by taking some or all of a number of thing Here * is used to denote the gap. So the number of gaps = 6.
irrespective of its order is called combination. Making three ladies sit out of 6 gaps = 6p3.
Algebra 33 34 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

4.4 Some Important Results 5.2 General terms of Binomial expansion (x + a)n:
(a) nc0 + nc1 + nc2 + …… + ncn = 2n Tr + 1 = n c r x n – r a r
(b) nc0 + nc2 + nc4 + …… = 2n – 1 5.3 General terms of Binomial expansion (x – a)n:
(c) nc1 + nc3 + nc5 + …… = 2n – 1 Tr + 1 = (–1)r ncr xn – r ar
(d) ncr + ncr + 1 = n + 1cr + 1 5.4 Middle term:
n
cr n − r +1 For the expansion of (x + a)n
(e) n
=
cr −1 r If n = even
th
n
pr n 
There will be only one middle term i.e.  + 1 terms
(f) n
=n–r+1 2 
pr −1 If n = odd
(g) If ncx = ncy then either x = y or x + y = n there will be two middle terms
th th
n
1 cr  n + 1
i.e. 
 n + 3
and 
(h) n =
pr r !  2   2 

(i) If n is odd, ncr is greatest when 5.5 Important Results:

l For the expansion of (1 + x)n; the coefficient of xr will be
n −1 n +1 nc
r= or r
2 2
(j) If n is even, ncr is greatest when Tr +1 n − r + 1 a
l = ⋅ [for the expansion of (x + a)n]
Tr r x
n
r= l Term independent of x in the expansion of (x + a)n will
2
(k) nc0 = 1; nc =n be found by first finding Tr + 1 and equating the index of x
1
to zero.
nc
n(n − 1) n n(n − 1)(n − 2)
2 = ; c3 = and so on. l For the binomial expansion (x + a)n
2! 3!
Tr + 1 from beginning = ncr xn – r ar
5. BINOMIAL THEOREM
Tr from end = ncr an – r xr
5.1 Binomial theorem for positive integral index
(x + a)n = nc0xn + nc1xn – 1.a1 + nc2xn – 2a2 + nc3xn – 3a3 + 6. LOGARITHMIC AND EXPONENTIAL SERIES
…… + ncnan. 6.1 Important Results
For the expanson of (x – a)n, the terms in the expansion will x 2 x3 x 4 xn
l ex = 1 + x + + + + …… + + ……
be alternately +ive and –ive. 2! 3! 4! n!
Algebra 35 36 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

x 2 x3 x 4 xn z1 + z2 = (x1 + x2) + i(y1 + y2)

l e–x = 1 − x + − + − …… + ( −1) n + ……
2! 3! 4! n! z1 – z2 = (x1 – x2) + i(y1 – y2)
2 3
m(m − 1) x m( m − 1)(m − 2) x z1z2 = (x1x2 – y1y2) + i(x1y2 + y1x2)
l (1 + x)m = 1 + mx + + +…
2! 3! 7.3 Different Powers of i
where |x| < 1
For x2 + 1 = 0
x −x 2 4
e +e x x x2 = –1
l = 1+ + + ……
2 2! 4!
⇒x= −1
x −x 3 5
e −e x x Since there is no real number which can satisfy the above
l = x+ + + ……
2 3! 5! equation, so Euler had invariably taken i = −1
l (1 + x)–1 = 1 – x + x2 – x3 + ……
Here ‘i’ is called ‘iota’
l (1 – x)–1 = 1 + x + x2 + x3 + ……
l i2 = –1 l i3 = –i l i4 = 1
l (1 + x)–2 = 1 – 2x + 3x2 – 4x3 + ……
l i5 = i l i6 = –1 l i4m = 1
l (1 – x)–2 = 1 + 2x + 3x2 + 4x3 + ……
2 3
l (i)4m + 1 = i l (i)4m + 2 = –1
x x
l log (1 + x) = x − + − …… Example: i467
2 3
= (i4)H6 . i3 = 1 . i3 = i3
x 2 x3
l log (1 – x) = − x − − − …… = –i3
2 3
1 1 1 7.4 Conjugate Complex Number
l log 2 = 1 − + − + ……
2 3 4 For z = x + iy
7. COMPLEX NUMBER z = x – iy is called the conjugate of z.
7.1 Definition y P (x, y)
A complex number may be defined as an ordered pair of real
numbers and may be denoted by symbol (x, y). y
x' x x
If z = x + iy be any complex number O –y
then Re(z) = x and Im(z) = y (x, –y)
y' Q
where Re = Real and Im = Imaginary.
7.2 Operations as Complex Number Example For Z = 2 + 3i0
l For z1 = x1 + iy1 and z2 = x2 + iy2 Z = 2 – 3i
Algebra 37 38 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

7.5 Representation of Complex Number on Argand Plane The value of θ in different quadrant can be extracted in
the following way—
y
y

2 A
B A (x, y)
4 + 2i (–x, y) (r, θ )
B (r,(rπ, p−–θ)θ )
1
–3 + i

x' –4 –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 5 x
θ x
x'
–1 O

–2 – 2i
–2
C
2 – 3i
–3
D (–x, –y) (x, –y)
(r, –(π – θ )) (r, –θ )
y'
y'
7.6 Modulus and Arguments of a Complex Number (a) In 1st quadrant i.e. when z = x + iy
Let z = x + iy (Cartesian Form) y if tan θ = tan α
If x = r cos θ P(x, y) ⇒θ=α
and y = r sin θ r y (b) In 2nd quadrant when z = –x + iy
then x2 + y2 = r2 θ θ=π–α
x' x x
O (c) In 3rd quadrant when z = –x – iy
⇒r= x 2 + y 2 is called Modulus
θ = –(π – α)
and is denoted by |z|
(d) In 4th quadrant when z = x – iy
i.e. If z = x + iy y'
θ = –α
2 2
|z| = x +y l Amplitude θ is choosen such that –π ≤ θ ≤ π
l Argument/Amplitude z 
l amp  1  = amp z1 – amp z2
y  z2 
θ = arg (z) = tan–1
x l amp (Z1 . Z2) = amp z1 + amp z2
l For z = r cos θ + ir sin θ (Polar Form) l If amp (z) = 0 or π ⇒ z is purely real.
Algebra 39 40 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(g) If a + ib = c + id
π
l If amp (z) = ⇒ z is purely imaginary. ⇒ a = c and b = d
2
(h) Modulus of product of two complex numbers is equal to
π the product of their moduli i.e. |z1z2| = |z1| |z2|.
l If amp (z) = ⇒ Real part = Imaginary part.
4 (i) Modulus of the quotient of two complex numbers is equal
7.7 Cube Roots of Unity to the quotient of their moduli.
l If x3 – 1 = 0 z1 z
= 1
x has three roots namely 1, ω and ω2 z2 z2

−1 + i 3 −1 − i 3 (j) Conjugate of the conjugate of a complex number is the

when ω = and ω2 = complex number itself
2 2
(z ) = z
7.7 Important Result on Cube Roots of Unity
(k) Product of a complex number and its conjugate is equal
l 1 + ω + ω2 = 0 to the square of its modulus.
l ω3 = 1 = ω6 = ω9 = …… = ω3n = 1 zz =| z |2
l ω4 = ω7 = ω10 = ω13 = …… = ω (l) Conjugate of the sum of two complex numbers is equal
l ω5 = ω8 = ω11 = ω14 = …… = ω2 to the sum of their conjugates.
z1 + z2 = z1 + z2
7.8 Important Theorem on Complex Number
(m) Conjugate of the product of two complex numbers is equal
(a) Addition of complex number is Commutative to the product of their conjugates.
z1 + z2 = z2 + z1 z1 z2 = z1 ⋅ z2
(b) Addition of complex number is associative
z 
(z1 + z2) + z3 = z1 + (z2 + z3) (n) arg  1  = arg z1 – arg z2
 z2 
(c) Multiplication of complex number is Commutative
z1.z2 = z2.z1 7.9 De-Moivre’s Theorem
(d) Multiplication of complex number is associative l For n to be an integer (positive or negative)
z1.(z2.z3) = (z1.z2).z3 (cos θ + i sin θ)n = cos nθ + i sin nθ
(e) Multiplication of complex number is distributive with and (cos θ + i sin θ)–n = cos nθ – i sin nθ
respect to addition l (cos θ + i sin θ) × (cos θ1 + i sin θ1) = cos (θ + θ1)
z1(z2 + z3) = z1z2 + z1z3 + i sin (θ + θ1)
(f) If a + ib = 0 ⇒ a = 0 and b = 0 when a and b are real 7.10 Logarithm of a Complex Number
numbers. l Log (a + ib) = 2nπi + log (a + ib)
Algebra 41 42 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l For a = r cos θ we say a is less than b and write a < b. If a – b is positive, then a is
b = r sin θ greater than b i.e. a > b.
1 b 9.1 Properties of Inequalities
log (r + iθ) = log(a 2 + b 2 ) + i tan –1
2 a (i) For any two real numbers a and b, we have
b a > b, or a = b or a < b.
where θ = tan –1 is called the argument.
a (ii) If a > b, and b < c ⇒ a > c.
(iii) If a > b then a + x > b + x, for x ∈ R.
8. LAW OF INDICES
(iv) If a > b then ax > bx for x > 0
If a number is repeatedly multiplied i.e. a × a × a, we write a3.
Here a is the base and 3 is the exponent. and ax < bx for x < 0
l am × an = am + n (v) If a > b ⇒ –a < –b
l am × a n × a p × … × a z = a m + n + p + … + z 1 1
(vi) If a ≠ 0, b ≠ 0 and a > b then < .
l am ÷ an = am – n a b
l (am)n = amn (vii) If a1 > b1, a2 > b2, … an > bn, then
l (ab)n = anbn a1 + a2 + … + a n > b 1 + b 2 + … + bn
m and a1.a2 … an > b1.b2 … bn
 a am
l   = m (viii) If x > 0 and a > b > 0 then ax ≥ bx.
 b b
(ix) If a > 1 and x > y > 0, then ax > ay.
l aº = 1
(x) If z > 1 and x > y then log ax > log ay.
1
l a–m = (xi) If 0 < a < 1, af (x) < af (y) ⇔ f (x) < f (y).
am
(xii) If a > 1, af (x) > af (y) ⇔ f (x) > f (y).
1
m
l am/n = (a ) n = n am 9.2 Important Theorems
1
l a n= n
a (i) Cauchy-Schwarz Inequality: If a1, a2 … an and b1, b2
l a1 = a
… bn be two sets of real numbers

 a
−n
 b bn
n then ∑ a12 ⋅ ∑ b12 ≥∑ (a1b1 )2
l   =  = n
 b  a a (ii) Tchebychef’s Inequality: If a1, a2, … an and b1.b2 … bn
be two sets of real numbers
9. INEQUALITIES such that a1 ≤ a2 ≤ a3 . ≤ an and
Definition: Let a and b be real numbers. If a – b is negative b 1 ≤ b 2 ≤ b 3 . ≤ bn
Algebra 43 44 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

then (a1 + b2 + … + an)(b1 + b2 + … + bn)

≤ n(a1b1 + a2b2 + … + anbn) a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
(iii) Weierstrass Inequality: If a1, a2, … an be all +ive
quantities such that a1 + a2 + … + an = Sn then, a3 b3 c3
(1 + a1)(1 + a2) … (1 + an) > 1 + Sn (if ai > 1)
b2 c2 a2 c2 a2 b2
Else = a1 − b1 + c1
b3 c3 a3 c3 a3 b3
(1 – a1)(1 – a2) … (1 – an) > 1 – Sn ( if ai < 1)
10. DETERMINANTS 10.2 Properties of Determinants
Definition: Consider the equations: (a) The value of determinant is not altered by changing rows
into columns and columns into rows.
a1x + b1y = 0 …(1)
and a2x + b2y = 0 …(2) a1 b1 c1 a1 a2 a3
Equation (1) gives a1x = –b1y …(3) a2 b2 c2 = b1 b2 b3
Equation (2) gives a2x = –b2y …(4) a3 b3 c3 c1 c2 c3
Dividing equation (3) by (4), we get (b) If two consecutive rows or columns are interchanged the
sign of the determinant is changed.
a1 x −b1 y
= a1 b1 c1 b1 a1 c1
a2 x −b2 y
a2 b2 c2 = − b2 a2 c2
a b
⇒ 1 = 1 a3 b3 c3 b3 a3 c3
a2 b2
(c) If two rows or columns of a determinant are identical, the
⇒ a1b2 = a2b1 value of the determinant is zero.
⇒ a1b2 – a2b1 = 0
a1 a1 c1
We shall express the above elimination as
a2 a2 c2 = 0 [Here C1 = C2]
a1 b1 a3 a3 c3
=0 …(5)
a2 b2
(d) If each constituent in any row or in any column be
The left hand member of equation (5) is called a multiplied by the same factor then the determinant is multiplied
DETERMINANT of second order. This consists of 2 rows and 2 by that factor.
columns.
pa1 b1 c1 a1 a2 a3
10.1 Determinant of 3rd Order
pa2 b2 c2 = p b1 b2 b3
A determinant of 3rd order will consist of 3 rows and 3
pa3 b3 c3 c1 c2 c3
columns.
Algebra 45 46 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

10.3 Cramer’s Rule a1x + b1y + c1z = d1

(a) Consider the following system of equations a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
a1x + b1y + c1 = 0 a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 a1 b1 c1 d1 b1 c1
when a1b2 – a2b1 = 0 then ∆ = a2 b2 c2 ∆x = d 2 b2 c2
a1 b1 a3 b3 c3 d3 b3 c3
then ∆ =
a2 b2
a1 d1 c1 a1 b1 d1
b1 c1 ∆y = a2 d2 c2 ∆z = a2 b2 d2
∆x =
b2 c2 a3 d3 c3 a3 b3 d3
c1 a1 ∆x ∆y ∆y
∆y = Here, x = y= and z=
c2 a2 ∆ y z
Hence
(i) If ∆ ≠ 0, the system has unique solution.
∆x ∆y (ii) If ∆ = 0 and at least any one of ∆x, ∆y and ∆z is non-
x= and y =
∆ ∆ zero, the system has no solution.
Case: 1 (iii) If ∆ = ∆x = ∆y = ∆z = 0, the system has infinite many
solution.
If a1b2 – a2b1 ≠ 0
11. MATRIX
the equations are consistent and has unique solution.
Definition: A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers, real
Case: 2 or complex. The numbers are called the elements of the matrix.
If a1b2 – a2b1 = 0 1 4 
A=  
the equations are inconsistent. 2 3
If ∆x = ∆y = ∆ = 0 This is a 2 × 2 matrix and it is denoted by A2 × 2. For a matrix
The equations will have infinite number of solution. A = [aij]m × n, m = number of rows and n = number of columns.
11.1 Transpose of a Matrix
Case: 3
If A is an m × n matrix, then the matrix obtained by
If a1b2 – a2b1 ≠ 0 interchanging rows and columns of A is called Transpose of
and atleast one of ∆x, ∆y is non-zero, the system will have no matrix A.
solution. A = [aij]m × n
(b) Consider the system of equations A' = [aij]n × m
Algebra 47 48 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

If A' = A, the matrix is said to be symmetric and if A' = –A, 11.4 Adjoint and Inverse of a Matrix
the matrix is said to be skew-symmetric.
The adjoint of a square matrix A = [aij] is defined as the
(a) A matrix which is both symmetric as well as skew transpose of the matrix [Aij], where Aij is the co-factor of the
symmetric is a zero matrix.
elements aij. Adjoint of the matrix A is denoted by adj A.
(b) Any square matrix can be expressed as the sum of a
A square matrix A is said to be invertible if there exist a square
symmetric and skew-symmetric matrix.
matrix B such that
1 1
A= (A + A1 ) + (A - A1 ) AB = BA = I
2 2
11.2 Properties of Transpose where I is the identity matrix. The inverse of A is denoted by
A–1.
l (A')' = A
l (KA)' = KA' AA–1 = A–1A = I
l (A + B)' = A' + B' 11.5 Solution of Equation using Inverse of a Matrix
l (AB)' = B'A' Consider the system of equations
11.3 Co-factors and Minors
a1x + b1y + c1z = d1
a1 a2 a3 a2x + b2y + c2z = d2
Let ∆ = b1 b2 b3
a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
c1 c2 c3
 a1 b1 c1  x  d1 
 c2   
b2 b3 Let A =  a2 b2 X =  y  B = d2 
then co-factor of a1 = A1 = (–)2
c2 c3  a3 b3 c3   z   d3 

b1 b3 then AX = B
co-factor of a2 = A2 = (–)3 Hence X = A–1B provided A ≠ 0
c1 c3

b1 b2
11.6 Area of Triangle by Determinant Method
co-factor of a3 = A3 = (–)4
c1 c2 A(x1, y1)
i.e. the co-factor of an element of ∆ is the determinant obtained by
omitting the row and column to which that elements belongs with
proper sign.

}
Minor of a1 = A1
Minor of a2 = A2 (without sign)
B(x2, y2) C(x3, y3)
Minor of a3 = A3 etc.
Algebra 49

Area of the ∆ABC =

x1 y1 1
1
= x2 y2 1
2
x3 y3 1
If ar (∆ABC) = 0, points are collinear.
Brahmagupta
12. PROPERTIES OF RADICALS
(598-665)
1
l n
a =a n

CHAPTER - 2
l n
ab = n a × n b
l mn
a = nm a ARITHMETIC
n
a a 1. DIVISIBILITY TEST
l n = n
b b l Divisibility by 2—A given number is divisible by 2, if the unit
n digit in the number is any one of 0, 2, 4, 6, 8.
l a n = a if n is odd. Example: 124, 32870
l
n
a n = a if n is even. l Divisibility by 3—A given number is divisible by 3, if the sum
of the digits of the given number is divisible by 3.
¨
Example: 324 is divisible by 3 as 3 + 2 + 4 = 9 is divisible by 3.
l Divisibility by 4—A given number is divisible by 4, if the number
formed by the last two digits is either 00 or divisible by 4.
Example: 2638428 is divisible by 4 because 28, the last two
digits, is divisible by 4.
l Divisibility by 5—A given number is divisible by 5 if unit
digit in the number ends with either 0 or 5.
Example: 125, 340
l Divisibility by 6—A given number is divisible by 6 if it is
divisible by both 2 and 3.
Example: 12, 18
l Divisibility by 7—Remove the last digit and substract twice
this digit from the remaining number. Repeat this process until
you get the multiple of 7.
Arithmetic 51 52 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Example: Is 18578 divisible by 7? Solution: 12 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12

Solution: 1857 – 2 × 8 = 1841 15 — 1, 3, 5, 15
184 – 2 × 1 = 182 18 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18
18 – 2 × 2 = 14 which is divisible by 7. Hence H.C.F. = 3
l Divisibility of 8—If the last three digits is either 000 or divisible l LCM: The LCM (Least Common Multiple) is the least number
by 8. which is exactly divisible by each one of the given numbers.
Example: 1000, 2458512 Example: Find the LCM of 12 and 18.
l Divisibility by 9—A number is divisible by 9 if the sum of Solution: Multiples of 12 — 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, …
digit finally comes out as 9, 18, 27, … (i.e. in the table of 9) Multiples of 18 — 18, 36, 54, 72, 90, …
Example: 41121 (4 + 1 + 1 + 2 + 1 = 9) is divisible by 9. L.C.M. = 36.
l Divisibility by 10—A number is divisible by 10 if the number Important Formulae on HCF and LCM
ends with 0.
LCM of Numerator
Example: 12380, 34070 l LCM of Fractions =
HCF of Donominator
l Divisibility by 11—A given number is divisible by 11, if the
l HCF × LCM = Product of two numbers
difference of the sum of the digits in odd places and the sum of
its digits in even places is either 0 or a multiple of 11. 1st Number × 2nd Number
l LCM =
Example: 4832718 HCF
Sum of digits at odd places = 8 + 7 + 3 + 4 = 22 1st Number × 2nd Number
l HCF =
Sum of digits at even places = 1 + 2 + 8 = 11 LCM
Difference = 22 – 11 = 11 which is divisible by 11. HCF× LCM
l First Number =
1.1 HCF and LCM Second Number
l Factors and Multiples: If a number m divides another number HCF× LCM
l Second Number =
n exactly, then we say that m is a factor of n and that n is a First Number
multiple of m.
1.2 Vulgar Fraction and Decimal Fraction
Example: 2 is a factor of 6.
l Sum of Fractions =
6 is a multiple of 2.
l HCF: The HCF (Highest Common Factor) of two or more than
(LCM of Denominators ÷ Denominator of Fraction) ×
Numerators of Fraction +
two numbers is the greatest number that divides each one of (LCM of Denominator ÷ Denominator of Fraction)
them exactly. × Numerator of Fraction
Example: Find the HCF of 12, 15 and 18. LCM of Denominator
Arithmetic 53 54 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

1 1 17 − 1 16
Example: + Example: (a) 0.1777… = 0.17 = =
2 3 90 90
3 ×1+ 2 ×1 5 346 − 34 312
= = (b) 2.3466 = 2.346 = 2 + =2
6 6 900 900
l Difference of Fractions =
1.5 Simplification
(LCM of Denominators ÷ Denominator of Fraction) × In simplifying an expression, the order of various operations
Numerators of Fraction +
(LCM of Denominator ÷ Denominator of Fraction) must be strictly maintained as given below:
× Numerator of Fraction (a) Vinculum (—) Example: 3 – 5 = –2
LCM of Denominator (b) Brackets: The order of removal of brackets should be—
1 1 () Parenthesis
Example: − {} Curly Bracket
2 3
[] Capital Bracket
3 ×1 – 2 ×1 1
= = Example: [4 – {3 – (2 – 1)}]
6 6
= [4 – {3 – 1}]
1.3 Rules for Converting Pure Recurring Decimal into = [4 – 2]
Vulgar Fraction =2
Write the repeated figures once in the numerator and take as (c) Of
many nines in denominator as is the number of repeating digits. 1 1 2
Example of 2 = × 2 =
3 3 3 3
Example: (a) 0.333… = 0.3 = (d) Division (÷)
9
(e) Multiplication (×)
035 35
(b) 2.035035… = 2.035 = 2 + =2 (f) Addition (+)
999 999
(g) Subtraction (–)
1.4 Rules for Converting a Mixed Recurring Decimal into Example: 2 + 2 × 2 – 2 ÷ 2
a Vulgar Fraction =2+2×2–1 (Division first)
From a fraction in which the numerator is the difference =2+4–1 (Multiplication)
between the number formed by all the digits after the decimal point,
=6–1 (Addition)
taking the repeated digits only once and that formed by the digits,
which are not repeated. The denominator is the number formed by =5 (Subtraction)
as many nines as there are repeating digits followed by as many Remember: VBODMAS for simplification of an expression
zeros as is the number of non-repeating digits. involving various sign.
Arithmetic 55 56 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

1.6 Algebriac Identities Used for Simplification 12 = 1 112 = 121 212 = 441 312 = 961 412 = 1681
(i) (a + b)2 = a2 + 2ab + b2 22 =4 122 = 144 222 = 484 322 = 1024 422 = 1764
(ii) (a – b)2 = a2 – 2ab + b2 32 = 9 132 = 169 232 = 529 332 = 1089 432 = 1849
(iii) (a + b)2 + (a – b)2 = 2(a2 + b2) 42 = 16 142 = 196 242 = 576 342 = 1156 442 = 1936

(iv) (a + b)2 – (a – b)2 = 4ab 52 = 25 152 = 225 252 = 625 352 = 1225 452 = 2025
62 = 36 162 = 256 262 = 676 362 = 1296 462 = 2116
(v) (a + b)2 = (a – b)2 + 4ab
72 = 49 172 = 289 272 = 729 372 = 1369 472 = 2209
(vi) (a – b)2 = (a + b)2 – 4ab
82 = 64 182 = 324 282 = 784 382 = 1444 482 = 2304
(vii) a2 + b2 = (a + b)2 – 2ab
92 = 81 192 = 361 292 = 841 392 = 1521 492 = 2401
(viii) a2 + b2 = (a – b)2 + 2ab 102 = 100 202 = 400 302 = 900 402 = 1600 502 = 2500
(ix) a2 – b2 = (a + b)(a – b)
1.8 Square Root
(x) a3 + b3 = (a + b)(a2 + b2 – ab)
Square root of a given number is that number the product of
= (a + b)3 – 3ab(a + b) which by itself is equal to the given number.
(xi) a3 – b3 = (a – b)3 + 3ab(a – b) Generally x is written to denote square root of x.
= (a – b)(a2 + b2 + ab)
1.9 Square Root of First Ten Numbers
(xii) (a + b)3 = a3 + 3a2b + 3ab2 + b3
(xiii) (a – b)3 = a3 – 3a2b + 3ab2 – b3 1 =1 2 = 1.414

(xiv) (a3 + b3 + c3 – 3abc) = (a + b + c)(a2 + b2 + c2 – ab – bc – 3 = 1.732 4=2

ca)
5 = 2.236 6 = 2.449
(xv) a3 + b3 + c3 = 3abc if a + b + c = 0
(xvi) (a + b + c)2 = a2 + b2 + c2 + 2ab + 2bc + 2ca 7 = 2.645 8 = 2.828

(xvii) (a + b)4 = a4 + 4a3b + 6a2b2 + 4ab3 + b4 9 =3 10 = 3.162

(xviii)(a – b)4 = a4 – 4a3b + 6a2b2 – 4ab3 + b4 2. SQUARE ROOT OF SOME IMPORTANT
2 2 2
( a + b) (a + b ) NUMBERS
(xix) ab = −
2 2 1 =1 441 = 21 1681 = 41 3721 = 61 6561 = 81
1.7 Square and Square Roots 4=2 484 = 22 1764 = 42 3844 = 62 6724 = 82
Square: A number multiplied by itself.
9 =3 529 = 23 1849 = 43 3969 = 63 6889 = 83
a × a = a2
Here is a list of squares of first 50 numbers. 16 = 4 576 = 24 1936 = 44 4096 = 64 7056 = 84
Arithmetic 57 58 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

25 = 5 625 = 25 2025 = 45 4225 = 65 7225 = 85 2.2 Percentage

By a certain percent, we mean that many hundredths.
36 = 6 676 = 26 2116 = 46 4356 = 66 7396 = 86
9
49 = 7 729 = 27 2209 = 47 4489 = 67 7569 = 87 Example: 9% =
100
64 = 8 784 = 28 2304 = 48 4624 = 68 7744 = 88 Here percentage is denoted by %.
x
81 = 9 841 = 29 2401 = 49 4761 = 69 7921 = 89 l x% = .
100
100 = 10 900 = 30 2500 = 50 4900 = 70 8100 = 90
xy
l y of x% = .
121 = 11 961 = 31 2601 = 51 5041 = 71 8281 = 91 100
l If two values are respectively x% and y% more than third
144 = 12 1024 = 32 2704 = 52 5184 = 72 8464 = 92
100 + x
169 = 13 1089 = 33 2809 = 53 5329 = 73 8649 = 93 value than the first is × 100% of the second.
100 + y
196 = 14 1156 = 34 2916 = 54 5476 = 74 8836 = 94 l If the price of a commodity decreases by x% then the
increase in consumption, so as not to decrease the
225 = 15 1225 = 35 3025 = 55 5625 = 75 9025 = 95
100 x
256 = 16 1296 = 36 3136 = 56 5776 = 76 9216 = 96 expenditure on this item = %.
100 − x
289 = 17 1369 = 37 3249 = 57 5929 = 77 9409 = 97 l If A’s income is x% more than B’s income, then B’s income

324 = 18 1444 = 38 3364 = 58 6084 = 78 9604 = 98  x 

is less than A’s income by  × 100  %.
100 + x 
361 = 19 1521 = 39 3481 = 59 6241 = 79 9801 = 99

400 = 20 1600 = 40 3600 = 60 6400 = 80 10000 = 100

2.3 Profit and Loss
l C.P. or the Cost Price of an article is the price or money
2.1 Cube for which the article has been purchased.
A number multiplied by itself three time i.e. a × a × a = a3. l S.P. or the Selling Price of an article is the price of money
Here is the list of cube of first 25 numbers. for which the article has been sold.
13 =1 63 = 216 113 = 1331 163 = 4096 213 = 9261 l if SP > CP then Profit/Gain occurs.
23 = 8 73 = 343 123 = 1728 173 = 4913 223 = 10648 l if CP > SP, the loss occurs.
33 = 27 83 = 512 133 = 2197 183 = 5832 233 = 12167 Important Formulae
43 = 64 93 = 729 143 = 2744 193 = 6859 243 = 13824 (i) Gain = SP – CP
53 = 125 103 = 1000 153 = 3375 203 = 8000 253 = 15625 (ii) Loss = CP – SP
Arithmetic 59 60 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Gain ×100 2.6 Mean Proportion

(iii) Gain % = Mean proportion between a and b is ab .
CP
Loss ×100 2.7 Third Proportion
(iv) Loss % =
CP Third proportion of a and b is b2/a.
100×SP 2.8 Fourth Proportion
(v) CP =
100 + Rate % For a, b, c the three numbers, its fourth proportion will be
 100 + Rate %  b×c
(vi) SP = CP   .
 100 a
Here Rate may be +ive or –ive. If Profit occurs Rate will be
2.9 Inverse Proportion
taken as +ive and if loss occurs Rate will be taken as –ive.
1 1 1 1
2.4 Ratio and Proportion If a : b = c : d then : = : is the inverse proportion.
a b c d
Ratio: The ratio of two quantities is the fraction that one
quantity is of other. The ratio of x to y is x : y, here x is called the 3. BASIC RULE BASED ON RATIO
antecedent and y is called consequent. a c e
(a) If = =
Proportion: The equality of two ratios is called proportion. b d f
If a : b = c : d then we write a : b :: c : d. Sum of Antecedent
Then each proportion =
a c Sum of Consequent
⇒ =
b d a+c+e
⇒ ad = bc =
b+d + f
⇒ Product of Extremes = Product of Means
(b) If a : b = x : y
2.5 Important Rule Based on Proportion b:c=m:n
(a) Alterando— a : b :: c : d ⇒ a : c = b : d You can find the ratio of a : b : c by equating the value of b in
(b) Convertendo— a : b :: c : d ⇒ a : a – b :: c : c – d each part of the ratio either by multiplying or dividing with a certain
quantity.
(c) Invertendo— a : b :: c : d ⇒ b : a :: d : c
Example: a : b = 2 : 3 and b : c = 4 : 5 then find a : b : c.
(d) Componendo— a : b :: c : d ⇒ a + b : b :: c + d : d
Since the value of b in two different ratios are 3 and 4 so take
(e) Dividendo— a : b :: c : d ⇒ a – b : b :: c – d : d the LCM of 3, 4 = 12 and multiply the first ratio by 4 and second
(f) Componendo and Dividendo—a : b :: c : d ⇒ a + b : ratio (b : c) by 3 so as to equate the value of b.
a – b :: c + d : c – d Hence, a:b=2:3 (× 4)
Arithmetic 61 62 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

b:c=4:5 (× 3) l If a pipe can fill a tank in x hours and another pipe can fill
⇒ a : b : c = 8 : 12 : 15  1 1
the tank in y hours then the tank will be filled in  + 
 x y
3.1 Distance, Time and Speed hours.
l Distance = Speed × Time 1
l If a pipe can fill a tank in x hours then part will be
Distance x
l Time = filled in 1 hour.
Speed
l If a pipe can fill a tank in x hrs and another pipe can empty
Distance the tank in y hrs then the time taken to fill the tank is
l Speed =
Time  1 1
l To change km/hr to metre/second; multiply the result by  x − y  hrs.
5/18.
3.2 Mensuration
18
l To change m/s to km/h multiply the result by . (a) Equilateral Triangle: When every side of a triangle is
5 equal, it is called equilateral triangle. A
l If a certain distance is covered at ‘a’ km/h and same
distance is convered at ‘b’ km/h, then 30
In ∆ABC 2a 2a
2ab
Average speed = km/h AB = BC = AC
a+b
l When two persons with speed x km/h and y km/h are ∠A = ∠B = ∠C 60
B a a C
moving in the same direction the
Average speed = (x – y) km/h 3
l Area of equilateral triangle = × (side)2
4
l When two persons with speed x km/h and y km/h are
moving in opposite direction their average speed = (x + y) l Perimeter of Equilateral triangle = 3 × side
km/h. 3
Length of Platform l Height of Equilateral triangle = × side
l Length of Train = × (Time taken to 2
Difference in Train cross the (b) Isosceles Triangle: A triangle having two sides equal.
pole/train) A
l If the speed of boat in still water = x km/h
Speed of current = y km/h
b b
then speed of boat
(a) in upstream = (x – y) km/h
(b) in downstream = (x + y) km/h B a C
Arithmetic 63 64 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

In ∆ABC, AB = BC and ∠B = ∠C b2 = a 2 + c 2 [Pythagoras Theorem]

1 c2 = b2 – a2
l Area = a 4b 2 − a 2
4 a2 = b2 – c2
l Perimeter = a + 2b
(Hypotenuse) 2
1 Area of Isosceles Right angle triangle =
a 4b 2 − a 2 4
l Perpendicular =
2 (e) Rectangle:
(c) Scalene Triangle: A triangle having no sides equal. A B

A 90º
O
90º
c b
D C
In ABC, AB ≠ BC ≠ AC
ABCD will be a rectangle if
B a C (i) AB = CD and AD = BC (Opposite sides are equal)
(ii) AC = BD (Diagonals are equal)
Perimeter = (2S) = a + b + c
(iii) AO = OC and BO = OD (Diagonal bisect each other at
a+b+c 90º)
Semi-Perimeter (S) =
2 l Area = Length × Breadth
Area = S ( S − a )( S − b)( S − c ) (Heron Formulae) l Perimeter = 2(Length + Breadth)

(d) Right Angle Triangle: l Diagonal = (Length) 2 + (Breadth) 2

A l When the verandah is outside the room/when there is a

path outside a rectangular field: ROOM

Perpendicular Hypotenuse (b)
(Height)(c)
Area of verandah/Path =
90
C 2 × Width of verandah/path ×
B Base (a)
[length + breadth + 2(width of verandah/path)]
1 l When the path is within the garden:
Area = × base × height
2 Area of path = 2 × width of path [length + breadth – 2(width
(Hypotenuse)2 = (Perpendicular)2 + (Base)2 of path)]
Arithmetic 65 66 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(f) Square: A B (b) ∠A = ∠C (opposite angles)

ABCD will be a square if ∠B = ∠D
(i) AB = BC = CD = AD 90 (c) Diagonals bisect each other [AO = OC and BO = OD]
(ii) ∠AOB = ∠BOC = O l Area = Base × Height
∠COD = ∠AOD = 90 l Perimeter = 2 × sum of adjacent side
(iii) AO = OC, BO = OD D C
l Ar(ABCD) = 2 × Ar(ABC)
(Diagonal bisect each other) A
(i) Rhombus:
(iv) AC = BD (Diagonals are equal)
ABCD is a rhombus if
l Area = (Side)2
(a) AB = BC = CD = AD
2
(Perimeter) (b) AC and BD are 90 O D
l Area =
16 perpendicular bisector at O B

(Diagonal) 2 (c) AC ≠ BD
l Area =
2 1
l Area = × d 1 × d2 d = diagonal C
l Perimeter = 4 × Side 2
l Perimeter = 4 × Sides
l Perimeter = 4 × Area
l Diagonal = Side × 2 d12 + d 22
l Side =
2
l Diagonal = 2 × Area
A D 2
(g) Quadrilateral:  Diagonal 
a l Diagonal = (Side) 2 −  
1 c b  2
Area = × c(a + b) C
2 (f) Trapezium:
B
1 ABCD is a trapezium if
= × Diagonal × (Sum of altitude)
2 AB||CD
A B
(h) Parallelogram:
ABCD will be a parallelogram if
A D
(a) Opposite sides are equal >>
and parallel
>

>

O D E C
AB = CD, AB||CD
1
AD = BC, AD||BC >> Area = × Height × (Sum of parallel sides)
B C 2
Arithmetic 67 68 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(k) Circle: 3.3 Volume and Area of Solid Figure

The path traced by a point which moves in such a way that its (a) Cuboid: A rectangular figure having six faces, each and
distance from the fixed point is always fixed. The fixed point is of which is a rectangle.
called the centre and the fixed distance is called the radius.
In the adjoining figure D h
O = Centre E
T
OA = Radius l
G A b
DC = Diameter O
EF = Chord F l Volume: l × b × h
EGF = Arc C
l Diagonal = l 2 + b2 + h2
DT = Tangent
l Surface Area = 2(lb + bh + lh)
TE = Secant
l Area = πr2 l Area of 4 walls = 2 × height (length + breadth)
O
Circumference = 2πr l Length of the largest rod kept in a room = l 2 + b2 + h2
θ
2πrθ
Arc Length = (b) Cube: A cuboid in which every face is a square is called a
360 A B
cube. Length of each face of a cube is called its edge.
πr 2 θ 1
Area of sector (AOB) = = (arc AB) × r l Volume = (Side)3
360º 2
 πr 2θ 1 2  l Side = 3
Volume
Area of minor segment =  − r sin θ 
 360 2  l Diagonal = 3 × Side
 2πrθ θ
l Surface area of a cube = 6 × (Side)2
Perimeter of minor segment =  + 2r sin 
 360 2
(c) Box/Tub
Area of circular path = π(R2 – r2)
When the box is covered
l Internal length = External length – 2 × Thickness
l External length = Internal length + 2 × Thickness
r
(d) Cylinder: The solid generated by the revolution of a
PA

R rectangle about one of its side as axis is called a cylinder.

TH

l Volume = πr2h
Arithmetic 69 70 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Area of Slant Surface = π(R + r)s

r
l Area of Whole Surface = π(R2 + r2 + Rr + rs)

h l s= h 2 + (R − r ) 2
(g) Sphere: When a semi-circle moves about its diameter,
r the solid generated is called a sphere.
l Surface Area = 2πrh 4 3 1 3
l Volume = πr = πd
l Total surface Area = 2πr(r + h) 3 6
l Curved Surface = 4πr2
l Volume of Hollow Cylinder = π(R2 – r2)h
l Volume of a Spherical Shell
(e) Cone: The solid generated by the revolution of a right
angled triangle about one of the sides containing the right angles 4 Sphere
= π(R 3 − r 3 )
as the axis is called a right circular cone. 3
h = height l Volume of a Hemisphere
l = slant height 2 3 r
l = πr
r = radius h 3 R
l2 = r2 + h2 l Surface Area of Hemisphere = 2πr2
1 2 r l Total Surface Area of Hemisphere = 3πr2Spherical cell
l Volume = πr h
3
2 2
l Surface Area = πrl = πr r + h
l Total Surface Area = πr(l + r)
(f) Frustrum: If a cone is cut by a plane parallel to the base
Hemisphere
so as to divide the cone into two parts, then the lower part is called
frustrum. (h) Prism: A right prism is a solid in which two ends are
congruent parallel figures.
r

π 2
l Volume = ( R + r 2 + Rr )h Prism
3
Arithmetic 71 72 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Volume = Area of Base × Height

100×S.I.
l Surface Area = Perimeter of Base × Height l R=
P×T
(i) Pyramid: A solid whose base is a plane rectilinear figure
100×S.I.
having the side faces as triangles meeting at a common vertex. l T=
P×R
l Amount = Principal + Interest
Amount ×100
l Principal =
100 + Rate × Time
(b) Compound Interest: The interest earned on capital when
the interest is periodically added to the principal.
l If P = Principal, R = Rate, T = Time
When Compound interest reckoned
(i) Annually:
Pyramid T
 R 
Amount = P 1 + 
 100 
1
Volume = × Height × Area of base (ii) Half-Yearly:
3
2×T
1  R 
Surface Area = × Slant height × Perimeter of base Amount = P 1 + 
2  2 × 100 
i.e. Rate = R/2 and Time = 2 × T
3.3 Interest
(iii) Quarterly:
(a) Simple Interest: If the interest on a certain sum borrowed
4×T
for a certain period is reckoned uniformly then it is called simple  R 
interest. Amount = P 1 + 
 4 × 100 
Principal× Rate × Time i.e. Rate = R/4 and Time = 4 × T
l Simple Interest =
100
(iv) If Principal = P, Rate = r1% for 1st year, r2% for 2nd
PRT year, r3% for 3rd year and so on and in the last rn% for
=
100 nth year
100×S.I.  r  r  r   r 
l P= Amount = P  1 + 1   1 + 2  1 + 3  …1 + n  
R×T  100   100   100   100  
Arithmetic 73 74 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

b 3.5 Annuity
(v) If Principal = P, Rate = R and Time = a i.e. Time is in
c Definition: A sequence of payments of the same amount made
fraction. at equal time intervals is called an Annuity.
a Types of Annuity on the Basis of Number of Payment Periods:
 R   R b
Amount = P 1 + 1+ ×
 100   100 c 
  (i) Annuity Certain: An annuity payable for a fixed number
of intervals of time is called an annuity certain.
 R 
T  (ii) Annuity Contingent: An annuity payable at regular
(vi) Compound Interest = P  1 +  − 1
 100  intervals of time till the happening of a specific event is
 
called an annuity contingent.
3.4 Alligation or Mixture (iii) Perpetual Annuity: An annuity payable forever is called
Alligation is the rule that enables us to find the proportion in a perpetual annuity.
which the two or more ingredients at the given price must be mixed Kinds of Annuity based on Mode of Payment:
to produce a mixture at a given price.
(i) Ordinary Annuity: An annuity in which payment are
Cost price of unit quantity of mixture is called the mean price.
made at the end of each interval is called an ordinary
l If two ingradients are mixed in ratio, then annuity.
Quantity of Cheaper C.P. of Dearer – Mean Price (ii) Annuity Due: An annuity in which payments are made
=
Quantity of Dearer Mean Price – C.P. of Cheaper at the beginning of each period.
we represent it as under: (iii) Deferred Annuity: An annuity which is payable after
C.P. of a unit C.P. of a unit the lapse of a number of periods.
quantity of Cheaper quantity of Dearer
(c) (d) Important Formulae:
l The amount of an ordinary annuity of Rs. P per period for
n periods at r% per period is given by
P r
Mean Price A= [(1 + i ) n − 1] where i =
(m) i 100
l The amount of an annuity due of Rs. P per period for n
periods at r% per period is given by
d–m m–c P r
A= (1 + i )[(1 + i ) n − 1] where i =
i 100
Cheaper quantity d − m
⇒ = l The amount of an ordinary annuity of Rs. A per period for
Dearer quantity m−c n periods at r% per period is given by
Arithmetic 75

A r
P= [1 − (1 + i )− n ] where i =
i 100
l The amount of an annuity due of Rs. A per period for n
periods at r% per period is given by
A r
P= (1 + i )[1 − (1 + i )− n ] where i =
i 100
l The amount of a deferred annuity of n periods deffered m Euclid
periods at r% per period is given by (Father of Geometry)
P r
A= [(1 + i )n − 1] where i = CHAPTER - 3
i 100
l The present worth of a deferred annuity of n periods, BASIC GEOMETRY
deferred m periods at r% per period is given by
A 1. EUCLID’S AXIOM
P= (1 + i )− m × [1 − (1 + i)− n ]
i Euclid, the father of Geometry, in his famous book ‘Elements’
r has proposed the following axiom:
where i = (a) Things which are equal to the same things are equal to
100
one another.
¨ (b) If equals are added to equals the wholes are equal.
(c) If equals are subtracted from equals, the remainders are
equal.
(d) Things which coincide with one another are equal to one
another.
(e) The whole is greater than the part.
(f) Things which are double of the same things are equal to
one another.
(g) Things which are halves of the same things are equal to
one another.
2. EUCLID’S POSTULATES
(a) A straight line may be drawn from any point to any other
point.
(b) A terminated line can be produced indefinitely.
(c) A circle can be drawn with a centre and a radius.
(d) All right angles are equal to one another.
Basic Geometry 77 78 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(e) If a straight line falling on two straight lines makes the

interior angles on the same side of it taken together less (c)
than 180º, then the two straight lines, if produced
indefinitely, meet on that sides on which the sum of angles
θ
is less than 180º.
Obtuse Angle
3. SOME IMPORTANT TERMS (90 < θ < 180)
l A part of a line with two end point is called a ling-segment.
(d) θ
(e)
A B
l A part of a line with one end point is called a ray. Straight Angle
θ = 180º
A
l If three or more points lie on same line, they are called θ
Reflex Angle
collinear points otherwise they are non-collinear. 180º < θ < 360º
A B C
(f) Adjacent Angles:
A, B and C are collinear.
A D
l An angle is formed when two rays meet at a point.
A
α
β
B C
Adjacent Angle
Arm ∠ ABC = ∠ ABD + ∠ DBC = α + β
B
C (g) Linear Pair of Angles:
Vertex

3.1 Different Types of Angles D

(a) (b)

α β
θ 90
A B C
Acute Angle Right Angle ∠ ABD + ∠ DBC = 180º
0 < θ < 90 θ = 90 α + β = 180º
Basic Geometry 79 80 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(h) Vertical Opposite Angle

A
A D
(c)
3
1 2 C
4
O B
AB ≠ BC ≠ AC
C B Scalane Triangle

When two rays AB and CD interact at O then two pairs

On the Basis of Angle
of vertical opposite angles are formed.
∠1 = ∠2 A

∠3 = ∠4 (a) 70

(i) Complementary Angles: When the sum of two angles

is 90º, they are said to be complementary to each other.
60 50
B C
Example: 50º and 40º are complementary angles.
All angles less than 90º
(j) Supplementary Angles: When the sum of two angles is (Acute Angle Triangle)
180º, they are said to be supplementary to each other.
Example: 60º and 120º are supplementary angles. A
A
3.2 Different Types of Triangle (b) (c)
On the Basis of Sides
110
A A C 90
B C
(a) (b) B
One angle greater than 90º One angle equal to 90º
(Obtuse Angle Triangle) (Right Angle Triangle)

3.3 Some Important Terms Related to Triangle

B C B C
AB = BC = AC AB = AC (a) Median: A line joining the vertex to the middle point of
Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle
its opposite side.
Basic Geometry 81 82 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

A O is the ortho-centre.
(e) Circumcentre: The point of concurrency of the
perpendicular bisectors of the sides of a triangle is called
circumcentre.

B D C
AD is median.
(b) Altitude: Perpendicular drawn from vertex to its opposite O
side.
A

(f) Incentre: The point of concurrency of the internal angular

bisector of a triangle is called incentre.

B C
D
AD ⊥ BC (AD is the altitude.)
(c) Centroid: The point of intersection of all the three
medians.
A O
×
×
F E
G 3.4 Parallel Lines
(a) Two lines are said to be parallel if they are extended
B C infinitely, they never meet each other.
D
G is the centroid. A B
(d) Ortho-Centre: The point of intersection of all the
altitude. C D
AB || (is parallel to) CD.
A
(b) E

F E A B
O C D
B C F
D
Basic Geometry 83 84 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

EF is the intersecting line. 1 1

2 10 12 2

(c) A B 11 3
1 3 9
10 4
4 8
9 5
2
C D 5 7 8 6
6 7
If AB || CD Octagon Decagon Dodecagon
(n = 8) (n = 10)
∠1 = ∠2 is alternate pair of angle. (n = 12)
l Sum of interior angle of polygon = (2n – 4) × 90º
(d) 1 2 If AB || CD
A B (2n − 4) × 90º
4 3 ∠1 = ∠5 l Each angle of a regular polygon =
n
∠4 = ∠8
5 6 l Sum of exterior angle of polygon = 360º
C D ∠3 = ∠7
8 7 n(n − 3)
∠2 = ∠6 l Number of diagonal of a polygon with n sides =
2
are called corresponding angles.
3.6 Important Theorem
(e) Condition of Parallelism:
(i) The sum of angles of a Triangle is 180º.
Two lines are parallel if
A
(a) Alternate angles are equal.
1
(b) Corresponding Angles are equal.
(c) Sum of interior angles of one side of transversal is
180º. 2 3
B C
3.5 Polygon In ∆ABC, ∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180º
A bounded figure having n sides where n ≥ 3. (ii) If a side of triangle is produced, then the exterior angle so
formed is equal to the sum of the two interior opposite
angles.
A
1

Quadrilateral Pentagon Hexagon 2 3 4

B
(n = 4) (n = 5) (n = 6) C D
Basic Geometry 85 86 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

∠ACD = ∠A + ∠B A
(iii) Angles opposite to equal sides of an isosceles triangle are
equal.
A D E

B C
In ∆ABC, D, E are the mid points of AB and AC.
B C 1
If AB = AC DE = BC
2
∠B = ∠C DE || BC
(iv) The side opposite to equal angles are equal. (vii) Converse of Mid-Point Theorem: If a line is drawn
A through the mid-point of one side and parallel to the third
side, it divides the another side equally.
A

B C D E
If ∠B = ∠C
AC = AB
B C
(v) The sum of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the If D is the mid point of AB,
third side.
and DE || BC
A ⇒ E is the mid-point of AC.
(viii) Pythagoras Theorem: In a right angled triangle, the
square of hypotenase is equal to the sum of squares of two
other sides.
A
B C
In ∆ABC
AB + BC > AC
(vi) Mid-Point Theorem: The line joining the mid-point of
90º
two sides of a triangle is parallel to the third and half of it. B C
Basic Geometry 87 88 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

In ∆ABC, ∠B = 90º A D

⇒ AC2 = AB2 + BC2

(ix) Converse of Pythagoras Theorem: If in a triangle, the
square of one side is equal to the sum of squares of other
two sides, the triangle is a right-angle triangle. 45º 60º 45º 60º
B C E F
4 cm 4 cm
A ∠B = ∠E 

∠C = ∠F  ⇒ ∆ABC ≅ ∆DEF
BC = EF 
A (xii) SSS Congruence: If all the three sides of one triangle are
B C equal to the three sides of another triangle then the two
triangles are congruent.
If AC2 = AB2 + BC2
A D
then ∠ABC = 90º
B C
(x) SAS Congruence: Two triangles are congruent if two sides 4 cm 4.5 cm 4 cm 4.5 cm
and the included angle of one triangle are equal to the two
sides and the included angle of the other triangle.
B C E F
5 cm 5 cm
A D AB = DE 

AC = DF  ⇒ ∆ABC ≅ ∆DEF
BC = EF 
(xiii) RHS (Right Angle-Hypotenuse-Side): If in the right
triangle the hypotenuse and one side of one triangle are
B C E F
equal to the hypotenuse and one side of other triangle then
AB = DE  the two triangles are congruent.
 A D
AC = DF  ⇒ ∆ABC ≅ ∆DEF

∠A = ∠D 
5 5
(xi) ASA Congruence: Two triangles are congruent if two
angles and included side of one triangle are equal to two
angles and the included side of other triangle. B C F E
4 4
Basic Geometry 89 90 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

In the above triangles, (xvi) The ratio of the area of two similar triangles equals to the
ratio of squares of their corresponding sides.
∠B = ∠E = 90º
BC = FE  A D
 ⇒ ∆ABC ≅ ∆DEF
AC = DF 
(xiv) Basic Proportional Theorem: If a line is drawn parallel
to one side of a triangle, then it divides the other two sides
containing it proportionally.
A B C E F
If ∆ABC ~ ∆DEF
D E Area (∆ABC) AB2 BC 2 AC 2
= = =
Area (∆DEF) DE 2 EF2 DF2
B C
(xvii) Parallelograms on the same base and between the same
In ∆ABC, parallels are equal in area.
if DE || BC A E D F
AD AE
⇒ =
BD EC
(xv) Converse of Basic Proportional Theorem: In a given
triangle, if a line drawn through two sides divides it
proportionally, then the line will be parallel to the third B C
side. ABCD and EBCF are two parallelograms on base BC and
A parallels BC and AF.
⇒ ar (ABCD) = ar (EBCF)
(xviii) Triangles on the same base and between the same parallels
are equals in area.
D E A D

B C

AD AE
In ∆ABC, if =
BD EC B C
then DE || BC ar (ABC) = ar (BCD)
Basic Geometry 91 92 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(xix) Medians of triangle divides it into two triangles of equal If AL = LB

areas. ⇒ OL ⊥ AB
A
(xxiii) The angle subtended by an arc of a circle at the centre is
double the angle subtended by it at any point on the
remaining part of the circle.
C

B C x
D
ar (ABD) = ar (ACD) [AD is the median] O
(xx) Centroid divides the median in the ratio of 2 : 1. 2x
A
B A

F E ∠AOB = 2∠ACB
G (xxiv) Angles on the same segment are equal.
B C A B
D
AG BG CG 2 y y
= = = [G is the Centroid]
GD GE GF 1
O
(xxi) Perpendicular drawn from the centre bisects the chord. x x
C D

O
∠CAD = ∠CBD
∠ACB = ∠ADB
A
(xxv) Angle in a semi-circle is right angle.
L B
A
if OL ⊥ AB ⇒ AL = BL
(xxii) The line joining the centre of a circle to the mid-point of a
chord is perpendicular to the chord.
B C
O

∠BAC = 90º
A L B (xxvi) Angle subtended in the major segment is acute.
Basic Geometry 93 94 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(xxvii) Angle subtended in minor segment is obtuse.

(xxviii) The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are A D A
supplementary. B

P P
A D D
C
B C
∠A + ∠C = ∠B + ∠D = 180º O
(i) When P is inside (ii) When P is out side
B C
PA × PB = PC × PD
(xxix) The length of two tangents drawn from an external point (xxxii) A line touches a circle and from the point of contact a
to a circle are equal. chord is drawn. The angles which chord makes with the
given line are equal respectively to the angles formed in
A the corresponding alternate segments.

C B
P

R
B
Q A P
PA = PB
∠BAP = ∠ACB
(xxx) Radius is perpendicular to tangent.
∠CAQ = ∠BRA
(xxxiii) If PT is a tangent and PAB is a secant then
O
T
r
90º
A B P
OA ⊥ AB [AB is tangent] A
(xxxi) If two chords of a circle intersect outside or inside the B
circle, the rectangle formed by the two segments of one
chord is equal in area to the rectangle formed by the two PT2 = PA × PB
segments of another chord. ¨
 96 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

x2 − 4 0
Lt=
x→ 2 x − 2 0
If a function f(x) takes the form of
0 ∞
, , ∞ – ∞, 0 × ∞, 1∞, 00, ∞0
0 ∞
then we say that f(x) is indeterminate.
Issac Newton
(1642-1727) L’ Hospital Rule: If φ(x) and ψ(x) are functions of x such
that φ(a) = 0 and ψ(a) = 0 then
CHAPTER - 4 f( x ) f '( x)
Lim = Lim
y ( x) xÆa y '( x)
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS xÆ a

Here differentiation of numerator and denominator are done

separately, until the value of devominator is non-zero.
1. IMPORTANT TERMINOLOGY
Example:
Limit: The number A is said to be the limit of f(x) at x = a if
any arbitrarily chosen positive number ∈, however small but not x2 -4
Lt
zero, there exists a corresponding number δ > 0, such that x Æa x - 2

|f(x) – A| < ∈ on Puting x = 2 we see it is in ÷ form.

Use L Hospital Rule.
for all values of x for which
2x
0 < |x – a| < δ Lt
1 x Æa
where |x – a| means absolute value of x – a without any regard to (Since devominator is non-zero.)
sign. =2×2=4
Right Hand Limit: If x approaches ‘a’ from the right
2. IMPORTANT FORMULA
f(a + 0) = Lt f(a + h)
x n - an
= na n -1 where a > 0
h→ 0
l Lt
Left Hand Limit: If x approaches ‘a’ from the left x Æa x - a

f(a – 0) = Lt f(a – h) ex - 1
h→ 0 l Lim =1
xÆ0 x
If both the limit exist and are equal, then limit exists. 1
l Lim(1 + x) x
=e
Indeterminate Form: Let us take an example: xÆ 0
Differential Calculus 97 98 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

ax -1 Ê pˆ
x
l Lim = log a l Lim Á1 + ˜ =e
p
xÆ 0 x xÆ0 Ë x¯
(1 + x) n - 1 x
l Lim =n Ê 1 ˆ 1
p
xÆ 0 x l Lim Á1 + ˜ = e
x Æ• Ë px ¯
log x
l Lim =1
xÆ1 x -1 3. SOME IMPORTANT EXPANSIONS
e x - e- x x3 x5
l Lim =2 sin x = x - + - º.
xÆ0 x 3! 5!
x2 x4
sin x cos x = 1 - + - º.
l Lim =1 2! 4!
xÆ0 x
x3 2 x5
l Lim cos x = 1 tan x = x + + + º.
xÆ 0 3 15
tan x x3 x5
l Lim =1 sin hx = x + + + º.
xÆ0 x 3! 15!
1 x2 x4
l Lim = 0 cos hx = 1 + + + º.
xƕ x 2 4!
1 4. CONTINUITY
l Lim =•
xÆ0 x A function f(x) is said to be continuous at x = a, if
sin -1 x Lt f (a + h) = Lt f (a - h) = f (a)
l Lim =1 hÆ 0 hÆ0
xÆ0 x otherwise discontinuous.
l Lt e = • x
l Suppose f and g be two real valued function continuous at
xƕ
x = c then
x
l Lt e = 0 (a) f + g is continuous at x = c
x Æ -•
(b) f – g is continuous at x = c
tan -1 x
l Lim =1 (c) f . g is continuous at x = c
xÆ 0 x
(d) f/g is continuous at x = c provided g(c) ≠ 0
1
Ê xˆ x 1
l f(x) is discontinuous at x = a in each of the following case:
l Lim Á1 + ˜ =e p
(a) f(a) is not defined.
xÆ 0 Ë p¯
Differential Calculus 99 100 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(b) Lim f ( x) does not exist. d

xÆ a l (constant) = 0
dx
(c) Lim f ( x ) π f (a ) [Removable discontinuity]
xÆ a d du dv
l (u ± v) = ±
5. DIFFERENTIABILITY dx dx dx
d dv du
A function f(x) is said to be differentiable at x = a if Rf ' (a) = l (u.v) = u + v
Lf ' (a) dx dx dx
where, du dv
v -u
f ( a + h) - f ( a ) d Ê ˆ
u dx dx
Rf ' (a) = Lim l Á ˜=
hÆ0 h dx Ë v ¯ v 2

f ( a - h) - f ( a ) d
Lf ' (a) = Lim l (sin x) = cos x
hÆ0 -h dx
Rf ' (a) is called Right hand derivatives and Lf ' (a) is called
the Left hand derivatives. d
l (cos x) = - sin x
l Important: Every Differentiable function is continuous dx
but every continuous functon need not be differentiable. d
l (tan x) = sec2 x
l If Rf ' (a) ≠ Lf ' (a), we say that f(x) is not differentiable at dx
x = a. d
l (cot x) = - cosec2 x
dx
6. DIFFERENTIATION
d
If y = f(x), then we define, l (sec x) = sec x.tan x
dx
dy f ( x + dx ) - f ( x ) d
= Lim l (cosec x) = -cosec x.cot x
dx dxÆ0 dx dx
dy d 1
we may define at x = a as, l (log x) =
dx dx x
d x
dy ˆ f ( x) - f (a) l (e ) = e x
˜¯ = Lim dx
dx x = a x Æ a x-a
d Ê 1ˆ 1
l Á ˜=- 2
7. IMPORTANT FORMULAE ON DIFFERENTATION dx Ë x ¯ x

l
d n
dx
( x ) = nx n -1 l
d
dx
( )
x =
1
2 x
Differential Calculus 101 102 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l
d
dx
( )
sin -1 x =
1
1 - x2
l
d
dx
( Ku ) = K .
du
dx

-1 d 1
l
d
dx
( )
cos -1 x =
1 - x2
l
dx
(sin h -1 x) =
1 + x2
x ŒR

( )
d 1 d 1
l tan -1 x = l (cos h -1 x) = x Œ (1, •)
dx 1 + x2 dx 2
x -1
-1
l
d
dx
( )
cot -1 x = 2
x +1 l
d
(tan h -1 x) =
1
x Π( -1,1)
dx 1 - x2
-1
l
d
dx
(
cosec -1 x = )
x x2 - 1
where |x| > 0
l y = sin u ⇒
dy
= cos u.
du
dx dx

l
d
dx
( )
sec -1 x =
x
1
2
x -1
where |x| > 0 l
d dw du
(uvw) = uv + vw + wu
dv
dx dx dx dx
d l If y = f (t)
l (sin hx) = cos hx x ŒR
dx and t = φ(x)
d
l (cos hx ) = sin hx x ŒR then
dy dy dt
= .
dx dx dt dx
d l If u = f (y) then
l ( tan hx ) = sec2 hx x ŒR
du du dy
dx
= ¥
dx dy dx
d
l (cot hx ) = -cosec h2 x x ΠR - {0}
dx dy
= f '( y ) ¥
d dx
l (cosec hx ) = -cosec hx.cot hx x ΠR - {0}
dx 8. DIFFERENTIATION OF ONE FUNCTION WITH
d RESPECT TO ANOTHER FUNCTION
l (sec hx ) = - sec hx.tan hx x ŒR Let y = f (x)
dx
and z = φ(x)
d x
l (a ) = a x .log a and we have to differentiate f (x) with respect to φ(x), then
dx
Differential Calculus 103 104 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

dy dy dx dy
= ¥ f (x, y) = 0, then it is convenient to find by the method of
dz dx dz dx
partial differentiation.
9. LOGARITHMIC DIFFERENTIATION dy - f x
=
f ( x) dx fy
If (i) y = [ f1 ( x)] 2
when fx is the differential coefficient of f (x, y) with respect to x,
(ii) y = f1(x).f2(x).f3(x)…. treating y as constant. Similarly fy is the differential coefficient of
f1 ( x). f 2 ( x) f (x, y) with respect to y, treating x as constant.
(iii) y =
f1 ( x).f 2 ( x) Example
then we take log of both sides before differentiation. f (x, y ) = x3 + y3 – 3axy = 0
Example of above cases fx = 3x2 – 3ay [Treat y as constant]
(i) y = (sin x)x; xx….etc. fy = 3y2 – 3ax [Treat x as constant]
(ii) y = sin x.x; xm.yn = (x + y)m + n dy - f x -3( x 2 - ay ) -( x 2 - ay )
= = =
sin x ◊ x dx fy 3( y 2 - ax) y 2 - ax
(iii) y =
cos 2 x
Higher Order Derivative
10. PARAMETRIC EQUATION If y = f (x)
If x = f(t) dy
= f ¢( x)
y = φ(t) dx
d Ê dy ˆ d 2 y
dy dy dx dy dt
= ∏ = ¥ Á ˜= = f ¢¢( x)
then dx Ë dx ¯ dx 2
dx dt dt dt dx
Implicit Function d Ê d2yˆ d3y
= = f ¢¢¢( x)
Let f(x, y) = C dx ÁË dx 2 ˜¯ dx3
Differentiate each term with respect to x
d Ê d n -1 y ˆ d n y
= = f n ( x)
d d
[f( y )] = [f( y )] ◊
dy dx ÁË dx n -1 ˜¯ dx n
dx dy dx
Rolle’s Theorem
Partial Differentiation
Let f be a real valued function, defined in the closed interval
If the equation of the curve is in the form of f (x, y) = c or [a, b] such that
Differential Calculus 105 106 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(i) f (x) is continuous at [a, b] dy

(ii) f (x) is differentiable at ]a, b[ Y-y= ( X - x)
dx
(iii) f (a) = f (b) l Equation of Normal
then, there exist a real number, c in ]a, b[ such that -dx
Y-y= ( X - x)
f ¢ (c ) = 0 dy
Lagrange’s Mean Value Theorem dy
l Slope of tangent = =m
If f (x) be a real valued function defined in closed interval [a, dx
b] such that
dx
(i) f (x) is continuous at [a, b] l Slope of Normal = -
dy
(ii) f (x) is differentiable at ]a, b[ l Equation of a tangent parallel to x-axis or Normal
then there exist a real number perpendicular to x-axis =
c ∈ ]a, b[ such that dy
=0
f (b) - f (a ) dx
f ¢ (c ) =
b-a l Equation of a tangent parallel to y-axis =

Important Thing to Remember dx

=0
(i) Every polynomial is continuous. dy
l If the equation of the curve be x = f (t) and y = φ(t) then
(ii) The Sine, Cosine, Exponential function, Logarithmic
y
function is continuous at every point. Equation of tangent = y – φ(t) = [x – f (t)]
x
(iii) The composite of two continuous function is continuous.
x
(iv) Every rational function is continuous. l Equation of Normal = y – φ(t) = - [x – f (t)]
y
Tangent and Normal l Tangent is parallel to x-axis if y = 0
y l Tangent is perpendicular to x-axis (or
to y-axis) if x = 0
Normal nt
nge Angle of Inter-section of Two Curve:
Ta
Angle of interesection of two curves means the angle between
the tangents to the two curves at their common point of
interesection.
x
If θ be the acute angle between tangents
l Equation of tangent
Differential Calculus 107 108 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

m1 - m2 y1 1 + m 2
tan θ = l Length of tangent PT =
1 + m1m2 m
where m1 = Slope of 1st curve
2
m2 = Slope of 2nd curve. l Length of Normal PN = y1 1 + m
l Two curves will cut each other orthogonally (at 90º) if
Maxima and Minima
m1m2 = –1
l Two curve will be parallel to each other if m1 = m2 y
l If the two curves be f (x, y) = 0 and φ(x, y) = 0 then
P (Maximum)
Ê dy ˆ -f
ÁË ˜¯ st = x )
dx I curve fy L
mum N
M i ni
Ê dy ˆ -f x φ (M
ÁË ˜¯ nd =
dx II curve fy
Obtuse
x
f x f y - f y .f x A O C B
then tan θ =
f xfx + f y f y
From the above figure, it is clear that at P the function y = f (x)
l Two curves f (x, y) = 0 and φ(x, y) = 0 will touch each is maximum and at Q, it is minimum.
other if θ = 0
Working Rule:
f x fx
fi = FIRST METHOD
fy fy
l Two curves f (x, y) = 0 and φ(x, y) = 0 will cut each other dy
l Calculate = 0 and solve for x.
orthogonally if θ = 90º ⇒ φx fx + φy fy = 0 dx
l Say x = a, b, c, ….
)
f(x dy
y= l Put values of x slightly less than a in and values of x
dx
slightly more than a.
P(x, y)
nt θ No dy
n ge rm l If changes sign from +ive to –ive, then f (x) is
Ta al dx
θ N maximum at x = a.
O T Q N
Differential Calculus 109 110 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

dy l For (x – a)(x – b) < 0

l If changes sign from –ive to +ive, then f (x) is minimum a<x<b
dx
at x = a. Example: (x – 2)(x – 3) > 0
l In case there is no change of sign, then we call it a point of ⇒ x > 3 and x < 2 (as 2 < 3)
inflexion. and (x – 2)(x – 3) < 0
SECOND METHOD ⇒2<x<3
Let y = f (x)
Take Another Example
dy If f '(x) = (x – 2)(x – 3)(x – 4)
l Calculate = 0 and solve for x.
dx Put f '(x) = 0
l Say x = a, b, c, ….
⇒ x = 2, 3, 4.
2
d y Mark these points on the number real line. Start with +ive
l Put x = a, b, …. in
dx 2 sign from x > 4 (extreme right) and then with alternatively –ive,
+ive, in successive interval move to the left.
d2y˘
l If ˙ > 0, then function obtains Minima – + – +
dx 2 ˚ x = a , b, º.
2 3 4
Put I (Increasing) and D (Decreasing) in the +ive and –ive
d2y˘ interval.
l If ˙ < 0, then function obtains Maxima.
dx 2 ˚ x = a , b, º.
– + – +
D 2 I 3 D 4 I
Increasing and Decreasing Function
Hence for x > 4 f (x) is increasing
y = f (x) is an increasing or decreasing function in a certain
3≤x<4 f (x) is decreasing
dy
interval, if = +ive or – ive respectively in that interval because 2≤x<3 f (x) is increasing
dx
x<2 f (x) is decreasing
the tangent will make an acute angle for increasing function and
will make obtuse angle for decreasing function: Rate Measure
A function f (x) is said to be increasing if f '(x) > 0 Dy
l If the ratio tends to a limit as ∆x tends to zero, it is
and decreasing if f '(x) < 0 Dx
called the rate of increase of y with respect to x. When
l For (x – a)(x – b) > 0 if a > b
Dy dy
x > a or x < b Lt exists it is denoted by and is called rate of
DxÆ0 Dx dx
Differential Calculus 111 112 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Let ∠XOP = θ
change
Y of y with respect to x.
∠POQ = ∆θ
dy Dy
= Lt Dq d q
dx DxÆ0 Dx The Angular Velocity = Lt =
Dt Æ0 Dt dt
l Velocity:
d Ê d q ˆ d 2q
S ∆S Angular Acceleration = Á ˜=
dt Ë dt ¯ dt 2
O P Q X
Application of Derivative in Commerce
Consider a particle moving along a straight line OX. Let
X l Total Cost = Fixed Cost + Variable Cost
OP = S be the distance travelled by the particle in time t
l Total Revenue = Amount recieved by selling x items
measured from a fixed point O along OX. Let the particle produced by a firm.
further travel a small distance PQ = ∆S in a small interval l Cost function: Cost of producing x items, it is denoted by
C(x).
of time ∆t.
l Average Cost (AC).
DS C( x)
The average speed in the interval ∆t =
Dt AC =
x
DS dS l Revenue function = Total Revenue R(x) obtained by selling
V = Velocity at time t = Lt =
Dt Æ0 Dt dt x items.
R(x) = px
dV d 2 S
l Acceleration (a) = = 2 where p is price per item.
dt dt
l Marginal Revenue (MR) = Rate of change of x items
l y
d
Q MR(x) = R
dx
P l Demand function: Demand function expresses the
relationship between the unit price that a product can sell
for and the number of units that can be sold at that price.
∆θ l Break-Even Point: Point where total cost and total revenue
θ x are equal.
O
C(x) = R(x)
At time t, Let P be the position of a moving point. Q be the ¨
positon of the point after an interval ∆t.
 114 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Ú sin x dx = - cos x + C
l Ú cos x dx = sin x + C
Ú sec x dx = tan x + C
2
l

Ú cosec
2
l x dx = - cot x + C
Gattfried Leibnitz
(1646-1716) l Ú sec x ◊ tan x dx = sec x + C
CHAPTER - 5 l Ú cosec x ◊ cot x dx = -cosec x + C
INTEGRAL CALCULUS l Ú
dx
= sin -1 x + C
2
1- x
INTEGRATION dx -1
It is the reverse process of differentiation.
l Ú 1 + x 2 = tan x+C
For example dx
l Úx = sec -1 x + C
d x -12
(sin x) = cos x fi Ú cos xdx = sin x
dx
Here ∫ is the sign of integration. The symbol dx indicates that l Ú cos hx dx = sin hx + C
the variable of integration is x.
List of Important formulae
l Ú sin hx dx = cos hx + C
Ú sec h
2
x n +1 l x dx = tan hx + C
l Ú x dx =
n
+C
n +1
Ú cosec h
2
l x dx = - cot hx + C
1 1
l Ú xn dx = -(n - 1) xn-1 + C l Ú sec hx.tan hx dx = - sec hx + C
l Ú
dx
= log x + C l Ú cosec hx.cot hx dx = -cosec hx + C
x
l Ú e dx = e
x x
+C l Ú tan x dx = log sec x + C
= – log cos x + C
ax
l Ú a dx = +C
x
log a l Ú cot x dx = log sin x + C
Integral Calculus 115 116 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Ú cos( x + a)dx = sin( x + a) + C x a2 + x2 a2

( x - a ) n +1
l Ú a 2 + x 2 dx =
2
+ log x + x 2 + a 2 + C
2
l Ú ( x - a ) dx =
n
+C
n +1
x a2 - x2 a2 x
sin( px + q ) l Ú a 2 - x 2 dx = + sin -1 + C
l Ú cos( px + q ) dx = +C 2 2 a
p
- cos( px + q ) x x2 - a2 a2
l Ú sin( px + q ) dx = +C l Ú x 2 - a 2 dx =
2
- log x + x 2 - a 2 + C
2
p
f ¢( x) dx
l Ú sec ( px + q)dx =
2 tan( px + q )
+C
l Ú f ( x)
= log f ( x) + C
p
dx
l Ú sec( px + q) tan( px + q)dx =
sec( px + q )
+C
l Ú x
= log x
p
- cosec( px + q )
l Ú cosec x dx = log(cosec x - cot x) + C
l Ú cosec( px + q) cot( px + q)dx = p
+C
x
= log tan +C
dx 1 -1 x 2
l Ú x 2 + a 2 = a tan a
+C
1 1 - cos x
= log +C
dx 1 x-a 2 1 + cos x
l Ú x 2 - a 2 = 2a log x + a +C
l Ú sec x dx = log(sec x + tan x) + C
dx 1 a+x 1 1 + sin x
l Ú a 2 - x 2 = 2a log a - x +C = log
2 1 - sin x
+C

dx x 1 + tan x
l Ú = sin -1 +C 2 +C
a = log
a2 - x2 1 - tan x 2
dx x
l Ú = log x + x 2 + a 2 + C = sin h -1 +C Ê p xˆ
a2 + x2 a = log tan Á + ˜ + C
Ë 4 2¯
dx x
l Ú = log x + x 2 - a 2 + C = cos h -1 +C
Úe [ f ( x ) + f ¢( x)]dx = e x f ( x ) + C
x
l
x2 - a2 a
Integral Calculus 117 118 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Rule to Solve Integration of special Type = l(2x + 6) + m

dx = 2xl + 6l + m
Type 1: Ú ax 2 + bx + c Equating power of like terms, l = 1, m = 0
When the denominator is a quadratic expression express it as the px 2 + qx + r
sum or differences of two square. Apply completing the square Type 3: Ú ax 2 + bx + c dx
rule to do so. Use appropriate formulae thereafter.
when Nr and Dr both are quadratic. In this case express
dx 1 dx
Example: = Ú d
4x + 4x + 5
2
4 x2 + x +
5 Nr = l(Denominator) + m (Denominator) + n
4 dx
2 x 2 + 3x + 4
1
= Ú
dx Example: Ú x2 + 6 x + 10 dx
4 x 2 + 2.x. 1 + 1 + 1
2 4 2x2 + 3x + 4 = l(x2 + 6x + 10) + m(2x + 6) + n
Compare the coefficients of x2, x and constant term, we have,
1 dx
= Ú
4 Ê 1ˆ
2 l = 2, m = -
9
and n = 11
2 2
ÁË x + ˜¯ + (1) 9
2
⇒ 2x2 + 3x + 4 = 2(x2 + 6x + 110) – (2x + 6) + 11
2
dx and proceed.
Now apply the formula Ú x2 + a2
dx dx
px + q
Type 4: Ú a + b sin2 x or Ú a cos2 x + b
Type 2: Ú ax 2 + bx + C dx
dx
When numerator is a linear equation whereas the denominator is a or Ú a cos2 x + 2b sin x cos x + b sin 2 x
quadratic equation. Apply
when Nr is constant and Dr contains cos2 x, sin2 x and sin x.cos x or
d any of them. Divide Nr and Dr by sin2 x or cos2 x so that Nr becomes
Numerator = l (Quadratic) + m
dx sec2 x or cosec2 x and Dr becomes something in terms of sec2 x and
where l and m are to be chosen in such a way that it becomes equal tan2 x or cosec2 x and cot2 x. Replace sec2 x or cosec2 x in Dr by
to given numerator. (1 + tan2 x) or (1 + cot2 x). Put tan x = u or cot x = v as the case may be.
2x + 6 dx
Example: Ú x 2 + 6 x + 8 dx dx sin 2 x
Example: Ú = Ú a
a + b sin 2 x sin 2 x
d 2 + b
2x + 6 = l (x + 6x + 8) + m sin 2 x sin 2 x
dx
Integral Calculus 119 120 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

cosec2 x dx Substitute,
=Ú 2
a cosec x + b x
cosec 2 x dx 1 - tan 2
=Ú cos x = 2
a (1 + cot 2 x) + b 2 x
1 + tan
Put cot x = u 2
⇒ –cosec2 x dx = du
x
and proceed. 2 tan
sin x = 2
dx x
Example: Ú a cos2 x + b 1 + tan 2
2
x
Divide N r and Dr by cos2 x. Now put tan = u and proceed further as discussed in Type 4.
2
dx.sec 2 x
Ú a + b sec2 x p cos x + q sin x cos x dx
Type 6: Ú a sin x + b cos x dx or Ú a sin x + b cos x etc.
sec 2 x dx
=Ú
a + b(1 + tan 2 x) Êd ˆ
Put Nr = L(Dr) + m Á D r ˜
Put tan x = u Ë dx ¯
⇒ sec2 x dx = du Compare the coefficient of sin x and cos x. By this method
the integral shall become as
dx
Example: Ú a cos2 x + 2b sin x.cos x + b sin 2 x d
M (Dr )
L( D r ) dx
Divide N2 and D2 by cos2 x = Ú Dr
dx + Ú
Dr
dx
sec2 x dx
Ú a + 2b tan x + b tan 2 x dx
Type 7: Ú ax 2+bx + c dx or Ú 2
ax +bx + c
Put tan x = u
⇒ sec2 x dx = du px + q
dx dx ax 2+bx + c
dx
or Ú
Type 5: Ú or Ú a + b cos x
a + b sin x Express Denominator in terms of completing the square; and
dx
or Ú a cos x + b sin x + C apply appropriate formulae.
Type 8:
1 1
Ú cas(x - a). cos (x - b) dx or Ú sin (x - a) sin (x - b)
Integral Calculus 121 122 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Rule: Multiply Nr and Dr by sin [(x–a) – (x–b)] = sin (b-a) I1 – I2

I2 part can be solved using Type 2 (Rule).
1 sin (b - a) dx Type 11: f 1 (x)
Ú
sin (b - a) cos( x - a).cos ( x - b)
Úe
x
[f(x)+ f 1 (x)] dx.= e x f(x)+ c.
1 sin[( x – a) – ( x – b)] dx
= sin(b – a) Ú cos ( x – a ).cos ( x – b) Example:

Ú e [sin x + cos x]dx

x
1 sin( x – a).cos( x – b) – cos( x – a)sin( x – b)
= sin(b – a) Ú cos( x – a).cos( x – b)
dx

here Ú ( x ) = sin x
1
sin(b – a ) Ú
= [tan( x – a ) – tan( x – b)] dx
f l ( x) = cos x
and proceed.
hence
Type 9:
Úe (sin x + cos x ) dx = Ú e x [ f ( x ) + f l ( x )]dx = e x f ( x ) + c
x
1 1
Ú sin(x – a). cos (x – b) or Ú cos (x – a).sin (x – b) dx
= e x sin x + c
Multiply Nr and Dr by cos (b–a) and proceed as shown in
Integration by Parts
Type 8
Integration of two or more than two functions can be solved
Type 10: When the Numerater and Denominator has
by integration by parts method.
quadratic expression.
d
x2 Ú u.v dx = u Ú v dx - Ú dx u Ú vdx)dx
Example: = Ú 5x2 + 4x + 3 dx Functions are selected generally on ILATE order.
I = Inverse x–1, sin–1 x….
1 5x2
= Ú 2 dx L = Logarithm log x….
5 5x + 4x + 3
A = Algebra x, y, ….
1 5 x 2 + 4 x + 3 – (4 x + 3) T = Trigonometry sin x, cos x, ….
5Ú
= dx
5x2 + 4 x + 3 E = Exponential ex, ax, ….

1 1 (4 x + 3)dx Example: l Ú xI .sinII x dx

=
5 Ú dx – Ú 2
5 5x + 4 x + 3
Integral Calculus 123 124 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

2 sin2 x = 1 – cos 2x
l Ú x .log x dx
II 2 cos2 x = 1 + cos 2x
I
-1
Ú IIx .sin I Ú sin
m
l x dx l x.cos n x dx
Case 1: When m or n or both are odd.
Important Result to learn:
If power of cos x is odd, put sin x = t and if power of sin x is
e ax (a cos bx + b sin bx) odd then put cos x = t.
Úe
ax
l .cos bx dx =
a 2 + b2 Case 2: When m and n are both even integer.
ax
e (a sin bx - b cos bx) For small even integers, convert them in terms of multiple
Úe
ax
l .sin bx dx = 2 2 angles by using:
a +b
2cos2 x = 1 + cos 2x
Special Type 2sin2 x = 1 – cos 2x
2 2
x +1 x –1 sin 2x = 2sin x.cos x
Ú x 4 + 1 dx or Ú x 4+1 l Important Trigonometrical Substitution
Take x2 common from Nr and Dr
1 1 Ê 1ˆ
2 (i) For integral of a 2 - x 2 and its powers put x = a sin θ
If Nr is 1 + 2 Substitute x2 + 2 = Á x - ˜ + 2 and put
x x Ë x¯
1 (ii) For integral of a 2 + x 2 and its powers put x = a tan θ
x- =t
x 2 x 2 - a 2 and its powers put x = a sec θ
1 1 Ê 1ˆ (iii) For integral of
If Nr is 1 – 2 substitute x2 + 2 in Dr = Á x + ˜ – 2 and
x x Ë x¯ (iv) For integral of a - x and its powers put x = a sin2 θ
1
put x + = u
x (v) For integral of a + x and its powers put x = a tan2 θ
Reduction Formulae (vi) For integral of x - a and its powers put x = a sec2 θ
Ú sin Ú cos
n n
l x dx or x dx
a-x
Case 1: When n is an odd integer (vii) For integral of put x = a cos θ
a+x
If the power of sin x is odd put cos x = t and if the power of
cos x is odd put sin x = t. Definite Integral
Case 2: When n is an even integer. If Ú f ( x)dx = F ( x)
When n is small, express sin x and cos x in terms of multiple
angles by using:
Integral Calculus 125 126 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

a a
l Ú- a f ( x)dx = 2Ú f ( x)dx if f (x) is an even function.
0
M
y For f (x) = f (–x) the function is even.
L f (x) = –f (–x) the function is odd.
na a
l Ú0 f ( x)dx = n Ú f ( x)dx if f (x) = f (a + x)
0

p
n -1 n - 3 1 p
Ú0 sin n x dx = ◊ º ◊ if n is even.
2
l
n n-2 2 2
p
n -1 n - 3 1 p
Ú0 cos n x dx = ◊ º ◊ if n is even.
2
O A B l
n n-2 2 2
x=a x=b
p
n -1 n - 3 2
Ú0 sin n x dx = ◊ º if n is odd.
2
b l
then Úa f ( x)dx = [ F ( x)]ba n n-2 3
= F(b) – F(a) p p
p 1
Ú0 log sin x dx = Ú log cos x dx =
2 2
l log
0 2 2
Fundamental Properties of Definite Integrals
b b Integration as a Sum of Limit
l Úa f ( x)dx = Úa f (t )dt b
b a Úa f ( x)dx = hLt [ f (a ) + f (a + h) + f (a + 2h) + º + f (a + n - 1h)]
l Úa f ( x)dx = - Úb f ( x)dx Æ0
where nh = b – a
b c b
l Úa f ( x)dx = Úa f ( x)dx + Úc f ( x)dx Products and Quotients of Trigonometric Function
a a Type 1: Ú sin n x .cos m x dx
l Ú0 f ( x)dx = Ú f (a - x)dx
0
l When n = odd
2a a a
l Ú0 f ( x)dx = Ú f ( x)dx + Ú f (2a - x)dx
0 0
Strip one (1) sine out and convert rest to cosines using
sin2 x = 1 – cos2 x. Substitute cos x = t
2a a
l Ú0 f ( x)dx = 2Ú f ( x)dx if f (2a – x) = f (x)
0
l When m = odd
Strip one (1) cosine out and convert rest to sines using
2a cos2 x = 1 – sin2 x. Substitute sin x = t
l Ú0 f ( x)dx = 0 if f (2a – x) = –f (x)
l When n and m both are odd
a
l Ú- a f ( x)dx = 0 if f (x) is an odd function. use either of two
Integral Calculus 127 128 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l When n and m both even AREA

Use half/double angle formulas to reduce the integral into l Area bounded by the curve given y = f (x) and x = a and
a form that can be integrated. x = b is the limiting value.
b
Type 2: Ú tan n x .sec m x dx Area = Úa y dx
y
l When n = odd
→ Strip one (1) tangent and secant out and convert the , y+ δ y)
+δx
rest to secant using Q (x y = f(x)
, y) δ y)
tan2 x = sec2 x – 1 P (x x, y
+
Substitute u = sec x ⇒ du = sec x . tan x dx +δ
(x, y) (x
Q
l When m = even P

→ Strip 2 secant out and convert rest to tangents using

sec2 x = 1 + tan2 x.
Substitute tan x = u
l When n is odd and m is even x
x=a δx x=b
Use either of the two discussed above. l Area bound by the curve given x = f (y) and y = a, y = b is
the limiting value.
Integration by Partial Fraction y
p( x)
l Any proper rational function can be expressed as x = f(y)
q ( x)
the sum of rational functions, each having a simplest factor
q(x).
1 A B Q (x + δ x, y + δ y)
l = + δy
( x - a )( x - b) ( x - a ) ( x - b) P (x, y)
1 A B C
l = + +
( x - a)( x - b) 2
( x - a ) ( x - b) ( x - b) 2

1 A Bx + C x
l = + 2 O
( x - a)( x + b) ( x - a) x + b
2 b b
Area = Úa f ( y) dy = Úa x dy
1 A Bx + C Dx + E l Area bounded between two curve y = f (x) and y = φ(x)
l = + 2 +
( x - a)( x + b)
2 2
( x - 1) x + b ( x 2 + b) 2 and the limiting value is x = a, x = b.
Integral Calculus 129 130 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

y (ii) If the equation of the curve involves even power of y,

then the curve is symmetrical about x-axis.
Example: y2 = 4ax is symmetrical about x-axis.
y
D

C
D' x' x
O
C'

x
O A B y'
x=a x=b
(iii) If the equation of the curve involves even power of x
b b
Area = Úa f ( x) dx - Úa f( x) dx and y, then the curve is symmetrical about both the axes.
x2 y2
b
= Ú [ f ( x) - f( x)]dx Example: +=1
a a 2 b2
The power of x and y are x' even, so the curve is
How to Trace the Curve symmetrical about both axes.
(a) Symmetry: If the equation of the curve involves even y
and only even power of x, then the curve is symmetrical about
y-axis.
Example: x2 = 4ay
Here the power of x is even, so the curve is symmetrical about x1 x
y-axis. y
O

y1
x' x (b) Points: Put y = 0 to find those values of x, where the
O
curve cuts the x-axis.
Similarly put x = 0 to find the value of y, where the curve cuts
the y-axis.
y' For x2 = 4ay
Integral Calculus 131 132 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Put x = 0 ⇒ y = 0 Here the lowest degree term = a2y2 – a2x2

Hence the curve passes through origin (0, 0). Hence the tangent at origin = a2(y2 – x2) = 0
If there are two curves the point of intersection can be obtained ⇒ y 2 – x2 = 0
by equating the equations. ⇒ y = ±x
x2 y2
Example: For = 4ay and = 4ax the point of intersection y
can be obtained by the following method: y = –x y = +x
x2 = 4ay …(i)
y2 = 4ax …(ii)
⇒ y4 = 16a2x2 (on squiring ii) O
⇒ y4 = 16a2.4ay (Substitute x2 = 4ay) x1 x
⇒ y(y3 – 64a3) =0
⇒ y = 0 and y = 4a
For y = 0, x = 0 y1
y = 4a, x = 4a
Hence, the point of intersections are (0, 0) and (4a, 4a). ¨

x2 = 4ay (4a, 4a)

x' x
O (0, 0)

y'
(c) Tangents at Origin: Tangents at origin are obtained by
equating to zero the lowest degree terms occurring in the equation
of curve.
Example: a2y2 = a2x2 – x4
 134 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Formation of Differential Equation

(a) Write the given equation first
(b) Differentiate it successively
(c) Eliminate arbitrary constant if any
Solution of Different Differential Equation
dy
Gottfried Leibnitz Type 1: = f ( x)
dx
(1646-1716) Rule: dy = f (x)dx
Integrate both sides,
CHAPTER - 6
Ú dy = Ú f ( x)dx + C
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATION
fi y = Ú f ( x ) dx + C

INTRODUCTION dy x
Example: = 2
l An equation involving independent variable x, dependent dx x + 1
dy d 2 y 1 2 x dx
variable y and differential coefficients , , º. is Ú dy = 2 Ú x 2 + 1
dx dx 2
called differential equation. 1
dy ⇒ y = log (x2 + 1) + C
Example: (i) =x 2
dx dy
Type 2: = f ( x ). g( y )
d2y
dy dx
(ii) + 6 y = x2
-5
dx dx 2 Rule: Separate the variable and integrate them.
l The order of a differential equation is the order of the dy
highest order derivative in the given equation. Ú g ( y ) = Ú f ( x)dx + C
d2y dy dy
+3 + 2 y = 4 is a differential equation of order 2. Example: ( x + 1) = 2 xy
dx 2
dx dx
l The degree of a differential equation is the degree of the ⇒ (x + 1)dy = 2xy dx
highest order derivatives, when differential coefficients dy 2 x dx
are made free from radicals and fractions. fi =
y x +1
2
d3y Ê dy ˆ Once the variable is separated integrate them.
- 6 Á ˜ - 4 y = 0 is a differential equation of
dx 3 Ë dx ¯
degree 1. dy
Type 3: = (ax + by + c)
dx
Differential Equation 135 136 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Rule: Put ax + by + c = u (ii) Put y = vx

dy x dv
Differentiate it with respect to x fi = = f (v )
dy 1 Ê du dx dx
ˆ
= Á - a˜ Separate the variable v and x
dx b Ë dx ¯
dx dv
On putting in original equation we have, =
x f (v ) - v
1 Ê du ˆ
Á - a˜ = u Integrate both side and obtain the solution in terms of v and x.
b Ë dx ¯ y
Separate the variable and integrate it. Finally replace = v to obtain the solution in x and y.
x
dy Type 5: Linear Differential Equation
Example: = sin (x + y)
dx dy
Put x + y = u + Py = Q …(1)
dx
dy du is the general form of linear differential equation of first order.
1+ =
dx dx dy
dy du Example: + 2 y = x3
fi = -1 dx
dx dx Rule: Obtain P and Q by first writing the equation in
dy
Substituting the value of and u = x + y, we have, dy
dx + Py = Q .
dx
du
- 1 = sin u l Find Integrating Factor I.F. = Ú P dx
dx l Multiply equation (1) by I.F.
e

du
fi = 1 + sin u l Integrate both sides of equation w.r.t. x, we get
dx
Separate the variable and integrate it. y.(I.F.) = Ú Q. I.F. dx + C
du
Ú 1 + sin u = Ú dx + C Another Form:
Linear differential equation may be
Type 4: Homogeneous function. dx
+ Px = Q
A function f (x, y) is called a homogeneous function of degree dy
n, if power of variable throughout the equation is n.
eÚ
In this case, I.F. = P dy and final solution is
Example: f (x, y) = x2 – y2 + 3xy is a homogeneous function
of degree 2.
Rule: (i) Put the differential equation in the form of:
x.(I.F.) = Ú Q. (I.F.)dy + C
dy f( x, y ) dx
Example: + cot y.x = cos y
= dy
dx y ( x, y ) ¨
 138 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Distance between two given points A(x 1, y 1, z1) and

B(x2, y2, z2) is

= ( x2 - x1 ) 2 + ( y2 - y1 ) 2 + ( z2 - z1 ) 2
l The co-ordinates of the mid-points of the line-segment
joining two points P(x1, y1, z1) and Q(x2, y2, z2) is
Êx +x y1 + y2 z1 + z2 ˆ
Leonahrd Euler =Á 1 2, , ˜
Ë 2 2 2 ¯
(1707-1783)
l The co-ordinates of the point R which divides the line
CHAPTER - 7 segment joining two points P(x1, y1, z1) and Q(x2, y2, z2)
internally and externally in the ratio of m : n are given by
THREE DIMENSIONAL GEOMETRY respectively:
Ê mx2 + nx1 my2 + ny1 mz2 + nz1 ˆ internally
ÁË , , ˜
BASIC CONCEPT ABOUT 3-D m+n m+n m+n ¯
y
mx - nx1 my2 - ny1 mz2 - nz1 ˆ
and ÊÁ 2 , , ˜ externally
xy plane
Ë m-n m-n m-n ¯
yz plane l Centroid of a triangle with vertices A(x 1 , y 1 , z 1 ),
B(x2, y2, z2) and B(x3, y3, z3) is
x
O A ((x
x 1y, yz1), z1)
1 1 1

xz plane

z F E
G
l The three planes determined by the pair of axes are the
co-ordinates planes, called xy, yz and zx planes. C ((x
x3 3y,3 yz33), z3)
l The three co-ordinates of plane which divide the space B (x(x 2) , D
2 y2, zy z)
2 2 2
into eight parts is called octants.
Ê x + x + x3 y1 + y2 + y3 z1 + z2 + z3 ˆ
z G= Á 1 2 , , ˜¯
Ë 3 3 3
C (0, 0, c) D (a, 0, c)
l Co-ordinate of a point on a line joining two given point
(0, b, c) E
c a
P (a, b, c) dividing the line in λ : 1 ratio is
x
Ê x1 + lx2 y1 + ly2 z1 + lz2 ˆ
O (0, 0, 0) A (a, 0, 0)
b
ÁË , , ˜
y
F (a, b, 0) l +1 l +1 l +1 ¯
Differential Equation 139 140 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Direction Ratios and Direction Cosines x2 – x1, y2 – y1 and z2 – z1

l If a line makes angle α, β, γ with co-ordinate axes then and direction cosines are
their cosines i.e. cos α, cos β, cos γ are called direction
cosines of the given line and are denoted by l, m and n. x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1
, ,
Hence, l = cos α, m = cos β, and n = cos γ
r r r
z where r = ( x2 - x1 ) 2 + ( y2 - y1 ) 2 + ( z2 - z1 ) 2
l If l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are direction cosines of the line
P OP and PQ; and θ be the angle between them
then cos θ = l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2
O 90º x
A sin θ = (l1m2 - l2 m1 ) 2 + ( m1n2 - m2 n1 ) 2 + ( n1l2 - n2l1 ) 2

l If a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2 be the direction ratio of two lines
and θ be the angle between them, then
y
l 2 + m2 + n 2 = 1 a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2
cos θ =
⇒ cos2 α + cos2 β + cos2 γ = 1 a12 + b12 + c12 a22 + b22 + c22
and, l Two lines are perpendicular to each other if
1– sin2 α+1– sin2 β+1– sin2 γ=1 l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2 = 0
⇒ sin2 α + sin2 β + sin2 γ = 2 or a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2 = 0
Direction cosines of axes are (1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0) and (0, 0, 1). l Two lines will be parallel to each other if
l The numbers which are proportional to direction cosine l1 m1 n1
of a line are known as direction ratios of the line. Let l, = =
l2 m2 n2
m, n be the direction cosine of a line, then
l m n a1 b1 c1
= = =r or = =
a b c a2 b2 c2
where a, b, c are called direction ratios l Lagrange’s Identity:
Since l = ar, m = br, n = cr (l12 + m12 + n12 )(l22 + m22 + n22 ) - (l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2 )
r = a 2 + b2 + c2 = (l1m2 – l2m1)2 + (m1n2 – m2n1)2 + (n1l2 – n2l1)2
l Direction ratio of the line passing through A(x1, y1, z1) 2 2 2
l1 m1 m n1 n l1
and B(x2, y2, z2) are = + 1 + 1
l2 m2 m2 n2 n2 l2
Differential Equation 141 142 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Projection of line joining two given points (x1, y1, z1) and Where θ is the angle between two lines.
(x2, y2, z2) on another line whose direction cosines are given
l Let the lines be
by l, m and n is
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
= (x2 – x1)l + (y2 – y1)m + (z2 – z1)n = =
a1 b1 c1
Straight Line x - x2 y - y2 z - z2
Æ and = =
l Equation of a line passing through a and parallel to vector a2 b2 c2
Æ
b is then the angle between them is
Æ Æ Æ a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2
r = a+ l b cos θ =
l Equation of a line passing through A(x1, y1, z1) and with a12 + b12 + c12 a22 + b22 + c22
direction ratio a, b and c is
when a1, b1, c1 and a2, b2, c2 are the direction ratios of the
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1 lines.
= =
a b c l If l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2 are the direction cosines then
l Equation of a line passing through A(x1, y1, z1) and with cos θ = l1l2 + m1m2 + n1n2
direction cosine l, m and n is Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
l Let r = a1 + l b1 and r = a2 + m b2 be two intersecting
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
= = lines
l m n Æ Æ →
→
l Equation of a line passing through two points a1 and a2 b1 a1
is
Æ Æ Æ Æ
r = a + l (a2 - a1 )
l Equation of a line passing through two points A(x1, y1, z1)
and B(x2, y2, z2) is
→ →
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1 b2
= = a2
x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1 then the shortest distance between the given lines =
l Angle between two straight line
Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ
r = a1 + l b1 (b1 ¥ b2 ) ◊ (a2 - a1 )
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
and r = a2 + m b2 is | b1 ¥ b2 |

Æ Æ x - x1 y - y1 z - z1 x - x2 y - y2 z - z2
b1 . b2 l If = = and = =
cos θ = Æ Æ
a1 b1 c1 a2 b2 c2
b1 b2 be two lines. The shortest distance between them =
Differential Equation 143 144 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Æ Æ Æ
x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1 r = a1 + l b
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2 d
2 2 2
(b1c2 - b2 c1 ) + (c1a2 - c2 a1 ) + (a1b2 - a2b1 )
Æ Æ Æ
l Plane through a given line : r = a2 + l b
Equation of plane passing through Æ Æ

x - x1 y - y1 z - z1 b ¥ (a2 - a1 )
= = is d = Æ
l1 m1 n1 |b|
is a(x – x1) + b(y – y1) + c(z – z1) = 0 …(1) l Foot of perpendicular from a point A(α, β, γ) to the line
where al1 + bm1 + cn1 = 0 …(2) x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
= = :
The condition (1) implies that the plane will pass through l m n
A(α , β , γ )
the point (x1, y1, z1) through which the line passes. The
second condition implies that the normal a, b, c will be
perpendicular to line l1, m1, n1.
l The condition of co-planarity of two lines
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
= =
a1 b1 c1 A'(x1, y1, z1) P (Foot)
Let P be the foot of perpendicular,
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
and = = is P = (lr + x1, mr + y1, nr + z1)
a2 b2 c2
First find the d.r’s of AP and apply the condition of
Æ Æ Æ Æ
(b1 ¥ b2 ) ◊ (a2 – a1 ) = 0 (Vector Form) perpendicularity of two lines.
l Foot of perpendicular from a point A(α, β, γ) to a given
x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1 plane ax + by + cz + d = 0
or, a1 b1 c1 (Cartesian Form)
=0 A(α , β , γ )
a2 b2 c2
l Distance between two parallel lines
Æ Æ Æ
r = a1 + lb
P Foot
Æ Æ Æ
and r = a2 + lb ax + by + cz + d = 0
Differential Equation 145 146 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

AP be the perpendicular from A to the given plane then it z

is parallel to normal so that its equation is
x -a y -b z - g C
= = =r P
a b c →
r
⇒ x = ar + α, y = br + β and z = cr + γ N
O y
Hence P = (ar + α, br + β, cr + γ). B
Put the value of x, y, z in given plane and find the value of
A
r. This will give the co-ordinate of P.
l Image (Reflection) of a point A in the line or plane. x
l Equation of plane in normal form
Æ L
A(α , β , γ ) r .n = d
L
where d is the distance of the plane from origin and n is
the direction of normal to the plane.
Æ
P
l Equation of plane passing through a point A( a ) and is
Æ
perpendicular to the vector N
Æ Æ Æ
= ( r - a ).N = 0
A' (image of A)
l Equation of plane passing through (x1, y1, z 1) and is
First find the foot of perpendicular from A to the line or perpendicular to the line with direction ratio a, b, c is =
plane (Discussed above). a(x – x1) + b(y – y1) + c(z – z1) = 0.
P is the mid-point of AA'. Once co-ordinate of P is known Æ Æ Æ
l Equation of plane passing through a , b and c is
the co-ordinate of A' can be obtained.
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Planes = ( r - a ).[( b - a ) ¥ ( c - a )] = 0
l Intercept form of the equation of a plane l Equation of plane passing through (x1, y1, z1), (x2, y2, z2)
and (x3, y3, z3) is
x y z
+ + =1
a b c x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
l Normal form of the equation of a plane x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1 = 0
lx + my + nz = p x3 - x1 y3 - y1 z3 - z1
where l, m, n are the d.c’s of the normal to the plane, which l Equation of plane passing through the intersection of the
is at a distance d from the origin. two planes
Differential Equation 147 148 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Æ Æ Æ Æ
r ◊ n1 = d1 and r ◊ n2 = d 2 is l If θ be the angle between two planes
Æ Æ Æ a1x + b1y + c1z + d1 = 0
r ◊ ( n1 + l n2 ) = (d1 + ld 2 )
and a2x + b2y + c2z + d2 = 0
l Equation of plane passing through the intersection of the
plane a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2
then cos θ =
a1x + b1y + c1z + d1 = 0 a12 + b12 + c12 a22 + b22 + c22
and a2x + b2y + c2z + d2 = 0 is
l Two planes are perpendicular to each other if
(a1x + b1y + c1z + d1) + λ(a2x + b2y + c2z + d2) = 0
p
l The two lines cos θ = 0 ⇒ θ =
Æ Æ Æ 2
r = a1 + l b1 ⇒ a1a2 + b1b2 + c1c2 = 0
Æ Æ Æ
a1 b1 c1
and r = a2 + l b2 and parallel if = = =0
a2 b2 c2
intersect each other if Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ Æ l Equation of plane parallel to r ◊ n = d is r ◊ n = l
(a2 - a1 ) ◊ (b1 ¥ b2 ) = 0
l The distance of the plane Ax + By + Cz + D = 0 from the
l Two lines point (x1, y1, z1) is
x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
= = | Ax1 + By1 + Cz1 + D |
a1 b1 c1
x - x2 y - y2 z - z2 A2 + B 2 + C 2
and = = are coplaner if
a2 b2 c2 l Angle between the line
Æ Æ Æ
x2 - x1 y2 - y1 z2 - z1 r = a+ l b
Æ Æ Æ
a1 b1 c1 = 0
and plane r ◊ n = d is
a2 b2 c2
Æ Æ Æ Æ
l Let r ◊ n1 = d1 b◊ n
Æ Æ sin θ = Æ Æ
and r ◊ n2 = d 2 b n
be two planes which intersect each other and the angle
between them is θ, then l Let the line and plane be
Æ Æ x - x1 y - y1 z - z1
n1◊ n2 = =
a b c
cos θ = Æ Æ and Ax + By + Cz + D = 0
n1 n2 The angle between them is given by
Differential Equation 149 150 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

aA + bB + cC is 2(u1 – u2)x + 2(v1 – v2)y + 2(w1 – w2)z + d1 – d2 = 0

sin θ =
2 2 2 2 2 2
a +b +c A +B +C i.e. S1 – S2 = 0
Sphere l Equation of co-axial spheres is
l Vector equation of a sphere of radius ‘a’ with centre at the x2 + y2 + z2 + 2ux + d = 0
Æ where d = constant and u = variable
origin is | r |= a
¨
l Equation of a sphere with centre C(α, β, γ) and radius r is
(x – α)2 + (y – β)2 + (z – γ)2 = r2
l Equation of a sphere with centre at the origin and radius r
is x2 + y2 + z2 = r2
l General equation of sphere is
x2 + y2 + z2 + 2ux + 2vy + 2wz + d = 0
where Centre = (–u, –v, –w)

and Radius = u 2 + v 2 + w2 - d
l Sphere on the join of two given points as diameter
= (x – x1)(x – x2) + (y – y1)(y – y2) + (z – z1)(z – z2) = 0
l The equation of sphere passing through A(a, 0, 0), B(0, b,
0), C(0, 0, c) and O(0, 0, 0) is
x2 + y2 + z2 – ax – by – cz = 0
l The equation of the tangent plane at (x1, y1, z1) is
xx1 + yy1 + zz1 + u(x + x1) + v(y + y1) + w(z + z1) + d = 0
and it is perpendicular to the radius through the point of
contact.
l Condition for orthogonal intersection of two spheres is
2u1u2 + 2v1v2 + 2w1w2 = d1 + d2
l The radical plane of two given sphere
S1 = x2 + y2 + x2 + 2u1x + 2v1y + 2w1z + d1 = 0
S2 = x2 + y2 + x2 + 2u2x + 2v2y + 2w2z + d2 = 0
 152 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

1st Quadrant (+, +) y

P(x, y)
2nd Quadrant (–, +)
3rd Quadrant (–, –) y
4th Quadrant (+, –)
x' x x
In the given figure O L

Rene Descartes P(x, y), PL = y and

(1596-1650) OL = x, comprises the
co-ordinate of Point P. y'
CHAPTER - 8
Important Points to Remember
CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY l Distance Formula: Distance between P(x 1, y 1) and
Q(x2, y2) is
QUADRANT
y PQ = ( x2 - x1 ) 2 + ( y2 - y1 ) 2
nd st
II Quadrant I Quadrant
(–, +) (+, +) P(x1, y1) Q(x2, y2)
x' x l Section Formula: If a point P(x, y) divides the joining of
O
rd th
III Quadrant IV Quadrant two points A(x1, y1) and B(x2, y2) in the ratio of m : n
(–, –) (+, –)
internally
y' m n

Two lines xox' (horizontal) and yoy' (vertical) are called x-axis P(x1, y1) P(x, y) Q(x2, y2)
and y-axis respectively. The point of intersection O is the origin.
mx2 + nx1
These two line divides the plane into four quadrant. The point then x =
of x-axis is caled ‘Abcissa’ and the point on y-axis is called m+n
‘ordinate’. The abcissa and ordinate together form co-ordinate. my 2 + ny1
y= m+n
Sing Scheme of Quadrant
y
3
l If the point P(x, y) lies outside the line AB, then P divides
II 2 I AB externally in the ratio of m : n, then
1
x' x
m
–3 –2 –1 0 3 2 1 n
–1
III IV
–2 A B P (x, y)
–3 (x1, y1) (x2, y2)
y'
Co-ordinate Geometry 153 154 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

mx2 - nx1 y
x=
m-n
my2 - ny1
y= (0, c)
m-n
l The mid-point P of two points A(x1, y1) and B(x2, y2) is Equation is y = mx + c

Ê x + x y + y2 ˆ c m
P=Á 1 2, 1 ˜
Ë 2 2 ¯
l Area of Triangle: Area of ∆ABC with its vertex A(x1, y1), θ x
B(x2, y2) and C(x3, y3) is O

1 Equation of a line which cuts off an intercept c on y-axis and

= [( x1 ( y2 - y3 ) + x2 ( y3 - y1 ) + x3 ( y1 - y2 )] makes as angle θ with the positive direction of x-axis.
2
m = tan θ is called the slope
A(x1, y1) (b) Intercept Form:
y

(0, b)
B
B(x2, y2) C(x3, y3)

b
l If the area of ∆ABC = 0
point A, B and C are collinear. x
O a A (a, 0)
STRAIGHT LINE
x y
l General form: Ax + By + C = 0 Equation of Line AB = + =1
a b
l Equation parallel to x-axis = y = b where a and b are the intercept on x-axis and y-axis. In this
l Equation parallel to y-axis = x = a case the portion AB of the line intercepted between the axis is of

l Distance of a point (x, y) from x-axis is | y | and from y- length a 2 + b2 .

axis is | x |. (c) Normal Form:
Different Form of Lines Equation is x cos α + y sin α = p.
(a) Slope Intercept Form: y = mx + c Here α is the angle which normal makes with positive
Co-ordinate Geometry 155 156 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

direction of x-axis and p is the perpendicular distance from the perpendicular to each other if
origin to the line. m1 × m2 = – 1
y
l Two lines l1 and l2 intersect each other and incline at angle
θ if
B | m1 - m2 |
tan θ =
L 1 + m1m2
p
where m1 and m2 are the slopes of intersecting lines l1 and
α l2 respectively.
x
O A
l Three points A, B and C are collinear if
l How to convert ax + by + c = 0 into Normal Form :
slope of AB = Slope of BC
Divide the line by a +b
2 2
C
B
a b c
⇒ x+ y+ =0
a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2 a 2 + b2
A
a
Put = Cos α
a 2 + b2
l Slopes and intercepts on axes by the line Ax + By + C = 0
b
= Sin α Coefficient of x –A
a 2 + b2 (i) Slope = m = =
Coefficient of y B
l Equation of a line passing through a given point A(x1, y1)
and having slope m is given by (ii) Intercepts: For x-intercept put y = 0 and for y-intercept
put x = 0
y – y1 = m(x – x1)
–C
l Equation of a line passing through two given points x intercept =
A(x1, y1) and B(x2, y2) is A
y - y1 y2 - y1 –C
= y intercept =
x - x1 x2 - x1 B
y - y1 (iii) Equation Ax + By + C = 0 will be parallel to x-axis if
Here m = 2 = slope A = 0 i.e. coefficient of x = 0
x2 - x1
(iv) Equation Ax + By + C = 0 will be parallel to y-axis if
l Two lines l1 and l2 are parallel if their slopes are equal
B = 0 i.e. coefficient of y = 0
i.e. m1 = m2
(v) It will pass through origin if C = 0
l Two lines l 1 and l 2 with their slopes m 1 and m 2 are
(vi) Equally inclined to axis if m = tan (±45º) = ±1
Co-ordinate Geometry 157 158 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

y ax + by + c = 0 is
b(x – h) – a(y – k) = 0
l Foot of perpendicular from a point to a given line:
P(α , β )
135º
45º 45º x
O

l Parametric Form of Equation:

x - x1 y - y1
= =r
cos q sin q M(h, k)
ax + by + c = 0

l Point of intersection of two given lines:

Solve the two equations and obtain x and y. (i) Find the slope of PM say it m1
l Three points are collinear: (ii) Find the slope of given line ax + by + c = 0, say it m2
If there are three equations in first degree given, solve (iii) Use m1 × m2 = –1
either of two and obtain x and y. Put the value of x and y l Length of perpendicular from a given point (x1, y1) to a
in 3rd; if the third equation is satisfied the three lines are given line ax + by + c = 0 is
collinear.
l Condition for the lines to be equally inclined to axis | ax + by + c |
=
m1 = –m2 a2 + b2
l How to write a line parallel to a given line: l Three lines a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
(a) Rule: Let ax + by + c = 0 be a given line. a2x + b2y + c2 = 0
Equation of line parallel to it is ax + by + λ = 0 change a3x + b3y + c3 = 0
only the constant term in the given equation, the terms
of x and y remaining unchanged. a1 b1 c1
(b) A line passing through (h, k) and parallel to ax + by + a
are concurrent if 2 b2 c2 = 0
c = 0 is a(x – h) + b(y – k) = 0 a3 b3 c3
l How to write a line perpendicular to a given line:
l Equation of bisectors of two lines:
(a) Rule: Let ax + by + c = 0 be a given line.
Equation of line perpendicular to it is bx – ay + λ = 0 a1x + b1y + c1 = 0
Interchange the coefficients of x and y in the given and a2x + b2y + c2 = 0 is
equation and change the sign in between them. Change a1 x + b1 y + c1 a2 x + b2 y + c2
also the constant term. =±
a12 + b12 a22 + b22
(b) A line passing through (h, k) and perpendicular to
Co-ordinate Geometry 159 160 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Image of a point P(a, b) about a line ax + by + c = 0 PAIR OF STRAIGHT LINE

Let P'(h, k) be the reflection of P(α, β), then O is the l The equation ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 represents a pair of
mid-point of PP'. The co-ordinate of O will satisfy the straight lines passing through origin.
P(α , β )
equation AB. l Let the lines represented by
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 be
y = m1x and y = m2x then
A O B
ax + by + c = 0 -2h
m 1 + m2 =
b
a
m1.m2 =
b
P'(h, k) l If θ be the angle between the lines represented by ax2 +
Again PO ⊥ AB 2hxy + by2 = 0, then
hence the product of their slope i.e. m1m2 = –1. On solving,
±2 h 2 - ab
we can find the value of P'(h, k). tan θ =
l To find the equation of a line, if the co-ordinate of a point a+b
P and its image Q is given. (a) If h – ab > 0, the lines represented by ax2 + 2hxy +
2

→ Write a line through the mid-point of PQ and by2 = 0 will be real and distinct.
perpendicular to PQ, whose slope is known. (b) If h2 – ab < 0, lines are imaginary and distinct.
l Ratio in which a line ax + by + C = 0 is divided by the line (c) If h2 – ab = 0, lines are real and coincident.
joining the points (x1, y1), and (x2, y2).
(d) If a + b = 0, lines are perpendicular.
C l The equation of bisectors of the angles between the lines
repesented by ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0 is given by
x 2 - y 2 xy
λ 1 =
a-b h
A O B
(x1, y1) (x2, y2) x2 - y 2 xy
fi =
ax + by + C = 0 Coeff. of x - Coeff. of y
2 2
half the coeff. of xy
D
l Equation of lines passing through the origin and
Let CD divides the line AB in λ : 1. perpendicular to the lines are represented by
l - ax1 + by1 + c ax2 + 2hxy + by2 = 0
Hence =
1 ax2 + by2 + c bx2 – 2hxy + ay2 = 0
Co-ordinate Geometry 161 162 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l General equation of second degree in x and y is CONIC SECTION

ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2gy + c = 0 The locus of a moving point P such that its distance from a
This equation represents two straight lines if fixed point S called focus bears a constant ratio ‘e’ to the distance
from a fixed line MZ called directrix is called conic section.
∆ = abc + 2fgh – af 2 – bg2 – ch2 = 0
l Angle between two straight lines is PS
= e (Eccentricity)
PM
±2 h 2 - ab
tan θ = For e > 1 the conic section is called Hyperbola.
a+b
e = 1 the conic section is called Parabola.
(i) The lines are perpendicular if a + b = 0 e < 1 the conic section is called Ellipse.
(ii) The lines are parallel if
Parabola
a h g
= = (i) Standard Equation y2 = 4ax
h b f
(iii) The lines are coincident if g2 = ac P(x, y)
l Points of intersection of pair of straight line M
L
K (a, 2a)
È f 2 - bc g 2 - ca ˘
Í 2 , ˙
ÍÎ h - ab h 2 - ab ˙˚
Z A S (a, 0) N
(–a, 0) (0, 0)
l If ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
L'
represents a pair of straight line, then the distance between (a, –2a)
them is given by
Vertex A = (0, 0)
2 2
g - ac f - bc Focus S = (a, 0)
2 or 2
a ( a + b) b( a + b) Foot of Directrix Z = (–a, 0)
l The equation of lines which joins origin to the given point Equation of directrix: x + a = 0
of intersection of line lx + my + n = 0 and the curve Length of Latus rectum = 4a
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, can be obtained by Extremities of Latus rectum = L(a, 2a) and L' (a, –2a)
making the curve homogeneous with the help of line
Focal distance of a point P(x, y) = a + x
lx + my + n = 0, which is
Equation of tangent at vertex = x = 0
2
Ê lx + my ˆ Ê lx + my ˆ (ii) Equation of Parabola x2 = 4ay
ax 2 + 2hxy + by 2 + 2( gx + fy ) Á + cÁ =0
Ë - n ˜¯ Ë - n ˜¯ Vertex A = (0, 0)
Co-ordinate Geometry 163 164 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Length of minor axis BB' = 2b

l Co-ordinates of major axis = A(–a, 0) and A'(a, 0)

S l Co-ordinates of minor axis = B(0, b) and B'(0, –b)

(–2a, a) L' L (2a, a)
a b2
A (0, 0)
x l Eccentricity e = 1-
a2
Z 2b 2
Focus S = (0, a) l Length of Latus Rectum LL' = 2l =
a
Equation of Directrix = y + a = 0
Ê b2 ˆ Ê -b 2 ˆ
Other form of Parabola where L = Á - ae, ˜ and L' Á - ae,
y y Ë a¯ Ë a ˜¯
l Focus S(–ae, 0) and S'(ae, 0)

Another Form of Ellipse

x' x x' x
O O x2 y2
l Equation: + = 1 , a2 > b2
a2 b2

y' y' A y = a/e

2 x2 = –4ay
y = –4ax
l The general equation of parabola passing through (h, k) is
(y – k)2 = 4a(x – h).
S (0, ae)
ELLIPSE
B' B
2 2 C
x y (0, -ae)
Standard Form 2
+ 2
=1
a b (0, –ae)
B
S' (0, -ae)
S'
P(x, y)
L
A' A'
Z
A S S'
Z' y' = –a/e
C (0, 0) N A'
–a (ae, 0) a
, 0 (–a, 0) (–ae, 0) ,0 l Length of major axis along y-axis = 2a
e e
L' B' l Length of minor axis along x-axis = 2b
l Length of major axis AA' = 2a l Foci = (0, ±ae)
Co-ordinate Geometry 165 166 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

2b 2 x = –a/e x = a/e
l Length of latus rectum = L
a
P(x, y)
b2 M
where e = 1 - 2
a
x2 y2 S' A' Z' C Z A N S (ae, 0)
l Tangent to Ellipse 2
+ 2
= 1 from (x1, y1) (–ae, 0)
a b
xx yy
= 21 + 21 = 1
a b L'
Length of Transverse axis = 2a; where A(a, 0) and A'(–a, 0).
x2 y2
l Normal to Ellipse + = 1 from (x1, y1) l Conjugate axis = axis along y-axis
a 2 b2
Length of conjugate axis = 2b
x - x1 y - y1
=
x1 a 2 y1 b 2 2b 2
l Length of Latus rectum 2l =
l Parametric equation of ellipse x = a cos θ a
y = b sin θ Ê b2 ˆ Ê -b 2 ˆ
l Tangent at point (a cos θ, b sin θ) where L Á ae, ˜ and L ' Á ae,
Ë a¯ Ë a ˜¯
x(a cos q) y (b sin q)
= 2
+ =1 l Focus = (±ae, 0)
a b2
ax by b2
l Normal at θ = - = a 2 - b2 l Eccentricity (e) = 1+
cos q sin q a2
l If y = mx + c is the line of tangents on ellipse xx1 yy1
2 2
l Tangent at (x1, y1) = 2
- =1
x y a b2
+ =1
a2 b2 x - x1 y - y1
2 2 2 l Normal at (x1, y1) = =
then c = ± a m + b x1 a 2
- y1 b 2
2 2 2
and equation of tangent = y = mx ± a m + b l Line y = mx + c is a tangent to the hyperbola if

HYPERBOLA c2 = a2m2 – b2
Ê - a 2 m -b 2 ˆ
x2 y2 and point of contact = Á ,
l Standard Equation - =1 Ë c c ˜¯
a2 b2
l AA' = Transverse axis = axis along x-axis l The line lx + my = n will be a tangent to the hyperbola if
a2l2 – b2m2 = n2
Co-ordinate Geometry 167 168 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l If y = mx + c is a tangent to the hyperbola,

Equation of tangent is y = mx ± a 2 m2 + b2
l Equation of the chord of contact of tangents drawn from
O (h, k)
hx ky
(h, k) = 2
-
=1 r
a b2
l Director Circle: The locus of point of intersection of two
perpendicular tangents to a hyperbola is called its director P (x, y)
circle. = (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
Equation of director circle = x2 + y2 = a2 – b2 l Equation of circle when centre is origin (0, 0) and
radius = r
l Auxillary Circle: The circle described on transverse axis x 2 + y2 = r2
of hyperbola as diameter is called Auxillary circle l Equation of circle with centre (h, k) and touching x-axis.
Equation of Auxillary circle: x2 + y2 = a2 y

l Parametric Equation of hyperbola

x = a sec θ and y = b tan θ
l Tangent at (a sec θ, b tan θ) O
(h, k)

x sec q y tan q r
= - =1
a b x
O
l Normal at (a sec θ, b tan θ) (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = k2 [k = r]
ax by Since it touches x-axis, hence y = 0
=
+ = a 2 + b2
sec q tan q Equation = x2 – 2hx + h2 = 0
l Equation of Rectangular hyperbola = x2 – y2 = a2 l Equation of circle with centre (h, k) and touching y-axis.
y
CIRCLE
l A circle is the locus of points which moves in a plane in
(h, k)
such a manner that its distance from a fixed point in the
h O
plane is constant. The fixed point is called centre and the
constant distance is called radius.
x
l Equation of circle with centre (h, k) and radius r O
Co-ordinate Geometry 169 170 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = h2 [³ h = r] Equation = (x – x1)(x – x2) + (y – y1)(y – y2) = 0

Since it touches y-axis at x = 0 l Equation of circle passing through three points:
⇒ Equation y2 – 2ky + k2 = 0 Let the equation of circle be:
l Equation of circle with centre (h, k) and touching both x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + h = 0 …(1)
axis:
y Put the co-ordinates of three point in equation (1) and
obtain three equations and solve them for g, f and c. Put
these values in equation (1) to obtain the required equation.
l Parametric Equation of circle x2 + y2 = a2
h (h, h) x = r cos θ and y = r sin θ
O
h l Parametric Equation for circle (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = r2
o x x = h + r cos θ
In this case, the centre of circle will be (h, h) and y = k + r sin θ
radius = h l The distance between the centres C1 and C2 of two circles
Equation x2 + y2 ± 2hx ± 2hy + h2 =0 (a) When they touch each other externally:
l General Equation of circle = x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
Radius = g2 + f 2 - c
Centre = (–g, –f )
r1 r2
l Length of intercepts on the axis made by the circle
C1 C2
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
Intercept on x-axis = 2 g 2 - c
Intercept on y-axis = 2 f 2 - c
= r 1 + r2
l Equation of circle whose co-ordinate at the end point of
diameter AB be A(x1, y1) and B(x2, y2) (b) When they touch each other internally = r1 – r2
P (x, y)
90º
r2
A B C1 r1
(x1, y1) O (x2, y2) C2
Co-ordinate Geometry 171 172 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Equation of the common chord of two circles S1 = 0 and l Equation of chord AB whose mid-point passes through
S2 = 0 is given by S1 – S2 = 0 (h, k) and centre lies on origin is hx + ky = h2 + k2

A
r1
C (0, 0)
O M O'

A B
L (h, k)
B

l Equation of family of circles passing through the l Length of tangent PT from P(x1, y1) to the circle
intersection of given circle S = 0 and given line P = 0 x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 is
= S + λP = 0 x12 + y12 + 2gx1 + 2fy1 + c = 0
l Equation of a circle passing through the intersections of l Two circles S1 = x2 + y2 + 2g1x + 2f1y + c1 = 0
given circles S1 = 0 and S2 = 0 is S1 + λS2 = 0 S2 = x2 + y2 + 2g2x + 2f2y + c2 = 0
l Tangent to a circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0 at (x1, y1) is will cut each other orthogonally if
xx1 + yy1 + g(x + x1) + f (y + y1) + c = 0 2g1g2 + 2f1 f2 = c1 + c2
l Tangent to a circle x2 + y2 = a2 at (x1, y1) is
xx1 + yy1 = a2 P
l Equation of Normal at (x1, y1) to the circle x2 + y2 = a2 is r1
90
r2
x y
= C1 C2
x1 y1
l Equation of Normal at (x1, y1) to the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx +
2fy + c = 0 is
x - x1 y - y1 l Angle of intersection of two circles
=
x1 + g y1 + g
r12 + r22 - d 2
l Equation of tangent to a circle x2 + y2 = a2 if y = mx + c cos θ =
2r1r2
touches the circle is y = mx ± a 1 + m2 where d = c1c2
l Equation of chord of contact from (x1, y1) to the circle l Two circles touching each other internally will have one
x2 + y2 = r2 is xx1 + yy1 = a2 common tangent.
Co-ordinate Geometry 173

David Van Dantzing

(1900-1959)
l Two circles intersecting each other will have two common
tangents. CHAPTER - 9
C
A
LINEAR PROGRAMMING
LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM
Maximise/Minimise Z = c1x1 + c2x2 + …. + cnxn
O
Subject to constraints:
a11x1 + a12x2 + …. + a1nxn(≤, =, ≥)b1
B a21x1 + a22x2 + …. + a2nxn(≤, =, ≥)b2
D
l If two circles touch each other externally, it will have three am1x1 + am2x2 + …. + amnxn(≤, =, ≥)bn
common tangents. x1, x2, x3 …. xn ≥ 0
E The above Linear Programming Problem has the following
C parts.
A
(i) Maximize/Minimise Z is called objective function.
(ii) The inequalities/equations are called constraints.
O (iii) x1, x2, …. xn ≥ 0 is the non-negative restrictions.
Mathematical Formulation of Linear Programming Problem
B (a) Denote the decision variable which is to be maximised/
D minimised by x1, x2, …. xn.
F
(b) Identify the objective function and express it as linear
¨ function of the variable (x1, x2, …). It is denoted by Z.
Put Maximum/Minimum whatever is required before Z
i.e. Max Z/Mini Z.
Linear Programming 175 176 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(c) Identify the set of constraints and put it at the end. containing origin will be shaded, otherwise the region
above the line (beyond origin) will be shaded.
Important Points to Remember
l Find the common shaded region of all graphs.
l A set of values of decision variables which satisfy the
constraints of LPP is called solution of LPP. l Determine the co-ordinates of vertices of the convex
l A solution of a LPP which satisfies the non-negative polygon.
restriction is called feasible solution and the set of all l Put these values in objective function. The point where
feasible solutions of LPP is called the feasible region. the objective function attains the optimum value is the
l A feasible solution which maximise/minimise the optimal solution.
objective function is called an optimal solution. Example: Solve x + y ≤ 5
l The set of all feasible solutions of LPP is a convex set.
Solution: Change the inequation into equation.
l LPP can be solved graphically by :
i.e. x + y = 5
(a) Corner Point Method
Divide throughout by 5
(b) Iso-Profit or Iso-Cost Method
x y
+ =1
Corner Point Method 5 5
Y x y
This turns out to be intercept from + = 1. Draw the graph
a b
y

A
B
6

X 5
O C
4

II

x+
3
OABC is a feasible region.

y=
5
2
Algorithm I
l Formulate LPP mathematically. 1

l Convert inequations into equations and draw graphs. 0 x

1 2 3 4 5 6
l Shade the region. The graph divides the plane into two
parts. Put x = 0, y = 0 in the given inequation. If the The line x + y = 5 divides the plane into two parts, namely I
inequation reduces to a valid statement, then the region and II.
Linear Programming 177 178 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Put x = 0, y = 0 in equation x + y ≤ 5 (c) Put x = 0, y = 0 in x + y ≥ 3

i.e. 0 + 0 ≤ 5 i.e. 0 + 0 ≥ 3 is false
0 ≤ 5 is true. hence the region above the line excluding origin will be
shaded.
Hence, the region containing origin will be shaded.
(d) The common shaded region is ABCD, called the convex
Example: x + y ≤ 5 and x + y ≥ 3 polygon.
Solution: Change the inequation into equation Iso-Profit or Iso-Cost Method
x+y=5 x+y=3 (a) Formulate the LPP mathematically.
x y x y (b) Draw the graph of all equations in xy-plane containing
+ = 1 [changing into + = 1 [ Dividing by 3]
5 5 3 3 all points that simultaneously satisfy all constraints and
intercept form] non-negative restriction to obtain the feasible region.
y (c) Obtain the co-ordinates of feasible region.
(d) Put some convenient value of z and draw the line so
obtained in xy-plane.
(e) If the objective function is of maximization type then draw
6
lines parallel to the line obtained in step (d), and obtain a
5 B (0, 5) line which is farthest from the origin and has atleast one
common point in feasible region.
4
(f) If the objective function is of minimization type, draw
A
the line parallel to the line obtained in step (d). Moreover
x+

3
(0, 3) obtain a line which is nearest to the origin and has atleast
y=

one point common to the feasible origin.

5

2
I
x+

(g) Find the co-ordinates of the common points obtained

y=

1
above. The point so obtained give the optimal solution
3

C (5, 0)
0 x and the value of objective function at these points give
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D the optimal solution.
(3, 0)
(a) Draw the graphs x + y = 5 and x + y = 3 Points to Remember
l Let X1 = (x11, x12) and X2 = (x21, x22) be any two points in
(b) Put x = 0, y = 0 in x + y ≤ 5
two dimensional plane, then
i.e. 0 + 0 ≤ 5 is True X = λX1 + (1 – λ)X2 λ∈R
So shade the region below the line containing origin by is any point on the line joining point X1 and X2. If 0 ≤ λ ≤
(= =) shade. 1, then x is any point on the line joining X1 and X2. Hence,
Linear Programming 179

E = {X/X = λX1 + (1 – λ)X2, λ ∈ R} is the line joining

point x1 and x2
E1 = {X/X = λX1 + (1 – λ)X2, 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1} is the line segment
joining point X1 and X2.
l A set E in two dimensional plane is said to be convex set
if for any two points X1 and X2 in E, the line segment
joining X1, X2 is contained in the set i.e. William Rowan Hamilton
X = λX1 + (1 – λ)X2 ∈ E for 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1 (1805-1865)
¨ CHAPTER - 10

VECTOR ANALYSIS
IMPORTANT POINTS TO REMEMBER
l The quantities which are specified by magnitude and
direction both are called vectors.
Example: Force, Velocity, Acceleration etc.
A directed line segment is called vector.

A  B
A directed line AB indicates that the line segment has
initial point at A and terminal point at B.
l The quantities which have only magnitude and are not
related to any direction in space are called scalars.
Example: Speed.
  
l If AB = a then AB = a, where AB means the
magnitude of vector a. The magnitude |a| of vector a is
called its modulus or module.
l Vectors are said to be like when they have the same sense
of direction and unlike when they have opposite directions.
l Two or more vectors are said to be collinear when they
act along the same line.
l Three or more vectors are said to be coplanar when they
Vector Analysis 181 182 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

are parallel to the same plane or lie in the same plane.  Æ  Æ
l Two vectors are said to be equal when they have the same Let OA = a and AB = b
length and are parallel.  Æ Æ
l A vector whose magnitude is of unit length is called a
then OB = a + b
unit vector. Complete the parallelogram OABC such that
Unit vector in the direction of a is denoted by aˆ.   Æ
Æ OC = AB = b
a
aˆ = Æ
  Æ
and OA = CB = a
a
 Æ Æ
 Hence OB = b + a ...(ii)
l If O be a fixed point and P be any point then OP is called from (i) and (ii) we get.
the position vector of P with respect to the origin O.
Æ Æ Æ Æ
Additions of Vectors fi a + b = b + a
Æ Æ
Let a and b be any two position vectors of points A and B Properties of Vectors
with respect to O i.e. B l If a vector r is expressible as
 Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
OA = a r = xa + yb + zc
 Æ Æ
AB = b Æ Æ
   Æ a +b where x, y, z are scalars then r is said to be a linear
then AB = OB - OA b
Æ Æ Æ
Æ  Æ combination of vector a , b and c .
b = OB - a
Æ Æ Æ
 Æ Æ l A system of vectors a1 , a2 , º. an is said to be linearly
fi OB = a + b A Æ O
a dependent if there exists a system of scalars λ1, λ2, … λn
This is called Triangle Law of Addition.
(λi ≠ 0) such that
Parallelogram Law of Addition of Vectors
Æ Æ Æ Æ
a l1 a1 + l 2 a2 +º+ l n an = 0
C B Æ Æ Æ
Æ
l A system of vectors a1 , a2 , º. an is said to be linearly
a independent if there exists a system of scalars λ1, λ2, ….λn
b+
Æ
Æ Æ Æ such that
b b b
Æ + Æ Æ Æ
a l1 a1 + l 2 a2 +º+ l n an = 0
O A
Æ implies that
a
Vector Analysis 183 184 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Æ Æ Æ Æ
λ1 = 0 = λ2 = … = λ n
(i) xa + yb + zc + ud = 0
Æ Æ
l If a and b are two non-zero collinear vectors and λ and (ii) x + y + z + u = 0
Æ Æ
µ are two scalars then l a + µ b = 0, for λ = 0 and N = 0 Important Results

Collinearity of Three Points Æ Æ Æ Æ

l Vector addition is commutative a + b = b + a
First Method: To prove that three points A, B, C are collinear,
l Vector addition is associative
show  
AB = l BC Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
i.e. a + ( b + c ) = ( a + b ) + c
where λ is a scalar.
Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ l For any vector a and b and a scalar m
Second Method: Three points with position vectors a , b , c
Æ Æ Æ Æ
are collinear, if and only if there exist scalars x, y, z not all zero m( a + b ) = m a + m b
such that
Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ l If A and B be two points with position vectors a and b
(i) xa + yb + zc = 0
respectively and let P be a point dividing AB internally in
(ii) x + y + z = 0 m : n, then the position vector of P is given by
Coplanarity of Three Vectors Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ  m b + m a
Three vectors a , b , c will be coplanar if OP =
m+n
Æ Æ Æ
a = lb + µ c Æ Æ
l If A and B be two points with position vector a and b
where λ and µ are two scalars. respectively and let P be a point dividing AB externally in
Coplanarity of Four Points m : n, then position vector of P is given by
Æ Æ
Ist Method:  m b - m a
OP =
To prove that the four points A, B, C, D are coplanar, find m-n
  
AB, AC and AD and then apply Æ
l If a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
  
AB = l AC + µ AD Æ
then a = a12 + a22 + a32
2nd Method:
Æ Æ Æ Æ
Four points with position vectors a , b , c , d are coplanar if
where iˆ, ˆj , kˆ are called unit vectors.
$ scalars x, y, z, u such that
Vector Analysis 185 186 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

 Æ Æ
l If OP is the position vector of a point P(x, y, z) in space l If a and b are like vectors then
 Æ Æ
then OP = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ. The vector xiˆ, yjˆ, zkˆ are called a ◊ b = ab
 Æ Æ
the components of OP along x-axis, y-axis and z-axis l If a and b are orthogonal vectors then
Æ Æ
respectively. a◊ b = 0
l For a vector l Let iˆ, ˆj , kˆ be unit vectors along three mutually
Æ perpendicular co-ordinate axis, x-axis, y-axis and z-axis
a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
Æ
then these vectors are said to form orthonormal triad of
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ vectors.
z
Æ Æ
a + b = (a1 + b1 )iˆ + (a2 + b2 ) ˆj + (a3 + b3 ) kˆ
Æ Æ
and a - b = (a1 - b1 )iˆ + (a2 - b2 ) ˆj + (a3 - b3 ) kˆ k̂
l Let P(x1, y1, z1) and Q(x2, y2, z2) two points and O be the
origin then
 O x
OP = x1iˆ + y1 ˆj + z1kˆ iˆ

OQ = x2iˆ + y2 ˆj + z2 kˆ ĵ
   y
PQ = OQ - OP
iˆ ◊ iˆ = ˆj ◊ ˆj = kˆ ◊ kˆ = 1
= ( x2 - x1 )iˆ + ( y2 - y1 ) ˆj + ( z2 - z1 )kˆ
 iˆ ◊ ˆj = ˆj ◊ kˆ = kˆ ◊ iˆ = 0
PQ = ( x2 - x1 ) 2 + ( y2 - y1 ) 2 + ( z2 - z1 ) 2
Æ Æ
a◊ b
DOT OR SCALAR PRODUCT l Projection of â on bˆ = Æ
Æ Æ |b|
Let a and b be two vectors and let θ be the angle between Æ Æ
Æ Æ a◊ b
Æ Æ l Projection of b on a = Æ
them, then the scalar product or dot products of a and b |a|
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
expressed as a ◊ b is defined as a ◊ b = | a | | b | cos q. l Components of b along and perpendicular to a are
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
( a◊ b ) a Æ ( a◊ b ) a
Important Properties and b -
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
2
2
l a ◊ a = | a | = length of a vector |a| | a |2
Vector Analysis 187 188 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Æ
l For a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
IMPORTANT PROPERTIES
Æ (a) Vector product is not commutative
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ Æ Æ Æ Æ

Æ Æ
i.e. a ¥ b π b ¥ a
a ◊ b = a1b1 + a2b2 + a3b3 Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
If the vectors are perpendicular to each other then (b) (ma ) ¥ b = m( a ¥ b ) = a ¥ (mb )
a1b1 + a2b2 + a3b3 = 0 (c) Vector product follows distributive law.
l Angle between two vectors Æ Æ Æ
Æ For any three vectors a , b and c
a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ a ¥ (b + c ) = a ¥ b + a ¥ c
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ Æ Æ
(d) Area of parallelogram with adjacent side a and b is
a1b1 + a2b2 + a3b3
is cos θ = Æ Æ
a12 + a22 + a32 b12 + b22 + b32 |a ¥b|
Æ Æ
(e) Area of parallelogram with diagonals a and b is given
VECTOR PRODUCT 1 Æ Æ
Æ Æ by = | a ¥ b | ĵ
Let a and b be two vectors and θ be the angle between 2
Æ Æ
them, where 0 ≤ θ ≤ π, then the vector or cross product of a and (f) iˆ ¥ ˆj = k
Æ
b is defined as ˆj ¥ kˆ = iˆ
Æ Æ Æ Æ
a ¥ b = | a | | b | sin q◊ nˆ
Æ Æ
kˆ ¥ iˆ = ˆj k̂ iˆ
where n̂ is an unit vector perpendicular to both a and b taken in Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ Æ (g) a ¥ b = - b ¥ a
such a way that a , b and n̂ form a right handed system. Æ

n̂
(h) If a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
Æ
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ

Æ iˆ ˆj
Æ kˆ
then a ¥ b = a1 a2 a3
Æ b1 b2 b3
b
θ (i) If θ be the angle between
Æ Æ
a a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
Vector Analysis 189 190 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Æ
a1 a2 a3
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ ÆÆÆ
then [ a b c ] = b1 b2 b3
Â(a2b3 - a3b2 ) 2 c1 c2 c3
then sin2 θ = ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ
 a12 ◊ b12
(ii) [ a b c ] = [ b c a ] = [ c a b ]
Æ Æ
ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ
(j) Two vectors a and b will be parallel if (iii) [ a b c ] = -[ a c b ] = -[ b a c ]
a1 b1 c1 (iv) Scalar triple product is zero, when two vectors are equal.
= =
a2 b2 c2 ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ
[ a a b ] = 0 = [ a b b ] etc.
Conditions for Three Points A, B, C to be Collinear Æ ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ ÆÆÆ
(v) [ a + b c d ] = [ a c d ] + [ b c d ]
First Method: Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
  (vi) [ a + b + c a + b d ] = [ a + b a + b d ] + [ c a + b d ]
(i) Determine AB and BC
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
 
(ii) Show AB ¥ BC = 0 = 0 +[ c a d ]+[ c b d ]
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Second Method: = [ c a d ]+[ c b d ]
Æ Æ Æ
Three points A, B, C with position vectors as a , b , c are Condition for Complanarity
Æ Æ Æ
collinear if there exists scalars l, m, n (not all zeros) such that l Three vectors a b c are coplanar if
(a) la + mb + nc = 0 Æ Æ Æ

(b) l + m + n = 0 [a b c ] = 0
Æ Æ Æ Æ
SCALAR TRIPLE PRODUCT l Four points A, B, C, D with position vectors as a b c d
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ will be coplanar if
( a ¥ b ) ◊ c = c ◊ ( a ¥ b ) is called the scalar triple product of Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ ÆÆÆ [b - a, c - a, d - a] = 0
three vectors a , b and c and is written as [ a b c ].
VECTOR TRIPLE PRODUCT
Properties of Scalar Triple Product Æ Æ Æ
Æ l For three vectors a , b and c , their vector product is
(i) If a = a1iˆ + a2 ˆj + a3 kˆ
given by:
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
b = b1iˆ + b2 ˆj + b3 kˆ a ¥ (b ¥ c ) = (a ◊ c ) b - (a ◊ b) c
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
c = c1iˆ + c2 ˆj + c3 kˆ (b ¥ c ) ¥ a = (a ◊ b) c - (a ◊ c ) b
Vector Analysis 191 192 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l The vector triple product is not commutative Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ

Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
a◊ a¢ = b ◊b¢ = c ◊ c¢ = 1
i.e. a ¥ ( b ¥ c ) π b ¥ ( c ¥ a ) Æ Æ Æ 1
(ii) [a ¢ b ¢ c ¢] = Æ Æ Æ
Scalar Product of Four Vectors [a b c ]
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
The Scalar product of four vectors a , b , c and d is given (iii) [ a ¥ b , b ¥ c , c ¥ a ] = [ a b c ]
2

by: Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ Æ Æ Æ
(iv) a ◊ b ¢ = a ◊ c ¢ = b ◊ c ¢ = 0
Æ Æ Æ Æ a◊ c a◊ d
(a ¥ b )◊( c ¥ d ) = Æ Æ Æ Æ (v) In the reciprocal system of ortho normal triad of unit
b◊ c b◊ d vectors iˆ, ˆj , kˆ is self orthogonal i.e. iˆ¢ = iˆ, ˆj ¢ = ˆj and
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ kˆ ¢ = kˆ
= ( a ◊ c )( b ◊ d ) - ( a ◊ d )( b ◊ c )
IMPORTANT RESULT
Reciprocal System of Vectors l Vector area of the triangle whose vertices are the point
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
The three vectors a ¢, b ¢, c ¢ defined by the equation a , b and c
Æ Æ 1 Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ b¥ c = [a¥ b + b¥ c + c ¥ a]
a¢ = 2
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
[a b c] l The point A( a ), B( b ) and C( c ) will be collinear if
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
Æ c¥ a
b¢ = a¥ b+ b¥ c + c¥ a = 0
Æ Æ Æ ¨
[a b c]
Æ Æ
Æ a¥ b
c¢ = Æ Æ Æ
[a b c ]
Æ Æ Æ
are called reciprocal system to the vectors a , b , c which are
ÆÆÆ
non-coplanar i.e. [ a b c ] π 0

Properties
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ
(i) For a , b , c if a ¢, b ¢, c ¢ be the reciprocal system of
vectors, then
 194 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(vi) For x ∈ B there exist x', called the complement of x in B

such that
x + x' = 1
x. x' = 0 (Complements law)
PRINCIPLE OF DUALITY
The dual of any statement in Boolean Algebra B is the
George Boole statement obtained by interchanging the operation + and ., and
(1815-1864) simultaneously interchanging the elements 0 and 1 in the original
statement.
CHAPTER - 11 Example: The duality of (1 + x).(0 + y) = y is
(0.x) + (1.y) = y
BOOLEAN ALGEBRA
Important Result
Let B be a Boolean algebra then for x and y in B we have
INTRODUCTION
(i) x + x = x (ii) x.x = x
Definition: A non-empty set B together with two operations
‘+’ and ‘.’ is said to be a Boolean Algebra if (iii) x + 1 = x (iv) x.0 = 0
(i) For all x, y ∈ B (v) x + (x.y) = x (vi) x.(x + y) = x
x + y ∈ B (Closure property for +) (vii) 0' = 1 (viii) 1' = 0
x.y ∈ B (Closure property for .) (ix) (x')' = x (x) (x + y)' = x'.y'
(ii) For all x, y ∈ B (xi) (x.y)' = x' + y'
x + y = y + x (Commutative law for +) Conditional Statement
x.y = y.x (Commutative law for .) The conditional statement p → q can be expressed in several
(iii) For all x, y, z ∈ B different ways.
(x + y) + z = x + (y + z) (Associative law for +) (a) if p then q
(x.y).z = x.(y.z) (Associative law for .) (b) q if p
(iv) For all, x, y, z ∈ B (c) p only if q
x + (y.z) = (x + y).(x + z) (Distributive law of + over .) (d) p is sufficient for q
x.(y + z) = (x.y) + (x.z) (Distributive law of . over +) (e) q is necessary for p
(v) There exist elements denoted by 0 and 1 in B such that Example:
for all x ∈ B (i) If ABC is a triangle, then ∠A + ∠B + ∠C = 180º
x + 0 = x (0 is additive identity) (ii) If ABC is a right angle triangle at ∠C = 90º, then
x.1 = x (1 is multiplicative identity) AB2 = AC2 + BC2
Boolean Algebra 195 196 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Points to Remember About Conditional Statement Arguments and Their Validity

(i) If both p and q have truth value T and, then p → q has An argument is the assertion that statement S follows from
truth value T. i.e. T → T = T. other statements S1, S2, … Sn
(ii) If p has truth value T and q has truth value F, then p → q The statement S is called conclusion and S1, S2, … Sn are
has truth value F. i.e. T → F = F.
called the hypothesis.
(iii) If p has the truth value F and q has the truth value T, then
p → q has the truth value T. i.e. F → T = T. Algorithm:
(iv) If both p and q have the truth value F, then p → q has the (i) Construct a truth table for all the hypothesis and
truth value T. i.e. F → F = T. conclusion.
Truth Value Table for p → q (ii) Find the rows having all entries of hypothesis T.
p q p→q (iii) If in each critical rows of hypothesis, the conclusion is
also true then statements are valid.
T T T
T F F CONSTRUCTING THE CIRCUIT
p q
F T T
F F T
Bi-conditional Statement
Lamp
Two statements p and q is said to be bi-conditional statements
if they are connected with connector ‘iff’ i.e. ‘if and only if’. It is
written as p ↔ q.
Circuit in Series
Points to Remember About Bi-conditional Statement
The lamp will be on if and only if both the switches p and q
(i) p ↔ q has truth value T if both p and q have the truth are closed.
value T or F.
Switches Lamp
(ii) p ↔ q has truth value F if p and q have opposite truth
values. p q State
Truth Table for p ↔ q Closed Closed On
p q p→q Closed Open Off
T T T Open Closed Off
T F F
Open Open Off
F T F
The closed and on is also denoted by T or 1 and open and off
F F T is denoted by F or 0.
Boolean Algebra 197 198 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

p x1
AND
q x2

INPUT OUTPUT
x1 x2 x1.x2
Lamp
1 1 1
1 0 0
Switches in Series 0 1 0
The lamp will be on if at least one of the switches is closed. 0 0 0
Switches Lamp
‘OR’ Gate
p q State
f (x1, x2) = x1 + x2, x1, x2 ∈ {0, 1}
Closed Closed On x1
Closed Open On OR x1 + x2
x2
Open Closed On
INPUT OUTPUT
Open Open Off x1 x2 x1 + x2
It can be further written as 1 1 1
Switches Lamp 1 0 1
p q State (pVq) 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 1 ‘NOT’ Gate
f (x) = x'
0 1 1
0 0 0 x NOT x'

Basic Boolean Gates

INPUT OUTPUT
In Boolean Algebra we basically deal with three Gates namely
AND, OR and NOT. x x'
‘AND’ Gate 1 0
f(x1, x2) = x1.x2 where x1, x2 ∈ {0, 1} 0 1
Boolean Algebra 199 200 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Mathematical Reasoning 8. Converse Statement: The converse of “if p then q” is “if

1. Sentence: A mathematically acceptable statement that is q then p”
either true or false but not both. Example: If a number x is odd then x2 is also odd. Its
Example converse is If x2 is odd then x is also odd.
i. Two plus two is four. 9. Contra positive Statement: “Contra positive of “if p then
ii. All Primes are odd. q “ is “if not q then not p”
Statement Like- Tomorrow is Sunday is not a sentence as Example : If a number is divisible by 4, it is divisible by 2.
it is true only on Saturday. Its contra positive is—
2. Negation: The denial of a statement is called the negation If a number is not divisible by 2 then it is not divisible
of the statement. by 4.
Example : p = New Delhi is in India 10. Contradiction Method: To check whether a statement p
p = New delhi is not in India. is true, we assume that p is not true. Then we arrive at
If p is a statement then its negation is denoted by p. some result which contradicts our assumption. Therefore
3. Compound Statement: Many Mathematical statement are we conclude that p is true.
obtained by combining one or more statements using some 11. Counter Method: This method involves giving an
connecting words like ‘and’ or ‘or’ etc. example of a situation where the statement is not valid.
4. Component Statements: Two or more statements used Such an example is called a Counter.
to combine for making a compound statement is called Example: In mathematics, counter examples are used to
component statements. disprove the statement.
Example : p : It is raining ¨
q : It is cold
Compound : - It is raining and cold.
5. Exclusive ‘OR’ Statement: In a Statement p or q if one
of the statements either p or q is true.
Example- Sun rises or Moon sets.
When the sun rises the moon sets. Only one of the
happening will take place. Hence ‘OR’ is exclusive.
6. Inclusive ‘OR’ statement: In a statement either p is true
or q is true or both are true.
Example : To apply for a driving license, you should have
a ration card or passport Here ‘OR’ is inclusive.
7. There exist : There exist is used for stating ‘at least one’
Example: p: There exist a quadrilateral where all sides
are equal.
This statement is equivalent to—
There is at least one quadrilateral whose all sides are equal.
 202 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

O
× ×
Archimedes B C
(287-212 BC) D
Here, O is the circumcentre.
CHAPTER - 12
OA = OB = OC = Radii of circumcentre.
STATICS ∠BOC = 2∠A, ∠COA = 2∠B and ∠AOB = 2∠C
If OD ⊥ BC then ∠OBD = 90º – ∠A
BASIC POINTS TO REMEMBER l Incentre: Point of intersection of bisectors of angles of a
Æ Æ Æ triangle.
l If force F1 , F2 , F3 ,º is acting at a point, then its resultant
Æ Æ Æ Æ Æ A
R = F1 + F2 + F3 +º = Â F
l Centroid:
A
N r M
r
I

G r
B C
X L
B C
L SD
Here, I is the incentre.
In ∆ABC, G is the centroid (point of intersection of all
three medians) –A
∠ BIC = 90 +
GS ⊥ BC and AL ⊥ BC, then
2
1 AI b
GS = AL and AB2 + AC2 = 2AD2 + 2BD2 = c+
3 IX a
1 Law of Parallelogram of Forces: If two forces acting at a
ar (∆ABC) = bc sin A
2 point are represented, vectorically by the sides of a parallelogram
l Circumcentre: Point of intersection of perpendicular drawn from that point, then their resultant is represented vertically
bisectors of sides of a triangle. by the diagonal of parallelogram drawn from that point.
Statics 203 204 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

C D a a
(ii) If P = Q then R = 2P cos and tan θ = tan
2 2
(iii) If α = 0 then R = P + Q (Maximum Resultant)
Æ
Æ
Q R (iv) If α = 180º, then R = P – Q (Minimum Resultant)
Component of a Force in Two Given Direction
A Æ B y
→
uuur P
If force P = AB
→ uuur b̂
force Q = AD A
M
→
uuur
resultant R = AC
Magnitude and Direction of the Resultant of Two Forces Æ

Acting at a Point: Two forces P and Q are working in the direction β R







 Æ α x
of AB and AD and diagonal AC is the resultant force of P and O L â
Æ
R sin b y
Q then R1 =
C
sin(a + b)
D
R sin a R
R2 =
Q sin(a + b)
ĵ
R If α + β = 90º
α α then R1 = R cos β
θ – α
A
P B L and R2 = R sin α. 90
α
R2 P2
+ 2PQ cos α + Q2 (Scalar form)
= O x
Triangle Law of Forces
iˆ
and R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2PQpˆ .qˆ (Vector form) Æ
Æ Æ C
| P¥ Q | Q
Moreover, tan θ = Æ Æ (Vector form)
2
P + P◊ Q Æ
Æ
Q sin a R Q
and tan θ = (Scalar form) O Æ
P + Q cos a P
Æ
Special Cases:
R
A Æ
B
(i) If α = 90º then R = P 2 + Q 2 and tan θ = Q/P P
Statics 205 206 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

If three coplanar forces acting at a point be represented in If three coplanar forces acting at a point are in equilibrium
magnitude and direction (but not in line of action) by the sides of each force is proportional to the sine of the angle between the
a triangle taken in order, the forces will be in equilibrium. other two.










Here AB + BC + CA = 0 P Q R
i.e. = =
sin a sin b sin g
Converse of Triangle Law of Forces λ-µ Theorem
If three coplanar forces acting at a point be in equilibrium, If two forces acting at a point O in directions OA and OB are
they can be represented vectorially by the sides of a triangle taken






into order, which is drawn so as to have its side respectively parallel represented by λ. OA and µ. OB then their resultant is represented




to the direction of forces. by (λ + µ) OC, where C is a point in the line segment AB, such
Law of Polygon of Forces that
Æ
D λ.CA = µ.CB
Æ F2
F3 Æ Æ
B
F4 F3



µ OB
O E C
Æ
F1
Æ O C
Æ



F5 F2 (l + µ)OC
Æ
Æ
F4 A Æ B

A
lO
F5 F1


If any number of coplanar forces acting at a point be
represented in magnitude and direction by the sides of a closed
polygon taken in order, the forces shall be in equilibrium. A

























AB + BC + CD + DE + EA = 0 l ◊ OA + µ ◊ OB = ( l + µ)OC

Lami’s Theorem Perpendicular Triangle Forces

Y A
α
Q
R Q
Æ
Æ 180 – α
γ R Q F E
α X
β P
180 – β 180 – γ γ
R B
β Æ B C
D
P
Z P
Statics 207 208 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

If three forces acting at a point be in equilibrium and they are RESULTANT OF PARALLEL FORCES
perpendicular to the sides of a triangle, then their magnitudes are
proportional to the sides of a triangle. P P
P Q R Q
= =
BC CA AB

IMPORTANT RESULTS
Q
(i) The algebriac sum of the resolved parts of any number
of coplanar forces acting at a point along any direction Like Parallel Force Unlike Parallel Force
is equal to the resolved part of their resultant in the same Æ Æ

direction. l If two like parallel force P and Q acts on two rigid bodies
A and B then the resultant of two like parallel forces is:
Y P Q P+Q R
= = =
Æ BC AC BC + AC AB
Æ
F3
Æ
F4 F2
ĵ
R →
Æ R
F1
X T W
O iˆ L M
→ →
R1 R2
S → U
X = ∑Xi → A C B
−F
F
Y = ∑Yi
(ii) Resultant F of any number of coplanar forces upon a
particle is
F2 = X2 + Y 2
Y O
and tan θ =
X l Resultant of two unequal unlike parallel forces acting on
(iii) The necessary and sufficient condition for the a rigid body is given by
equilibrium of coplanar concurrent forces are: P Q P-Q R
= = =
∑Xi = 0 and ∑Yi = 0 BC AC BC – AC AB
Statics 209 210 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

W M Sign of Moment
R2 →
→ O O
Q
U AFS C
→ B → R1
−F P

F F
L T (+ve) (–ve)
→
R → → →
The vector moment of a force F about a point O = r × F
→ → →
where P is a point on the line of action of F and P = r .
Varignon’s Theorem of Moments: The algebriac sum of
the moments of two coplanar forces (which are not equal and unlike
O parallel) about a point in their plane is equal to the moment of
l If three parallel forces acting on a rigid body are in their resultant about the same point.
equilibrium, then each is proportional to the distance ¨
between the other two.

P
P+Q
Q

A C B

P Q R
= =
BC CA AB

MOMENT
The moment of a force about a point is the product of the
force and the length of the perpendicular from the point to the line
of action of the force.
 212 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

dy dt dy
and tan α = dx dt = dx

l Angular Velocity: The angular velocity of a point moving

in a plane, about a fixed point in that plane is the rate of
its angular displacement about that point.
Galilei Galileo If the displacement of any particle in δt time is δθ in time
(1564-1642) t, then
δθ d θ
CHAPTER - 13 Angular Velocity = Lt =
δt →0 δt dt
DYNAMICS l Average Speed: If any particle covers s1 and s2 distance
in time interval t1 and t2 then its
BASIC POINTS TO REMEMBER s1 + s2
Average Speed =
t1 + t2
UNIFORM VELOCITY
l Triangle Law of Velocities: If a moving point possesses
l Speed: If δs is the distance covered in the short interval
two velocities simultaneously which are represented in
of time δt, then
magnitude and direction by two sides of a triangle taken
δs ds
Lt = in order, their resultant is represented by the third side in
δt →0 δt dt opposite order.
l Velocity: The velocity of a moving particle is the rate of
its displacement. l Parallelogram Law of Velocities: If a moving point
δs ds possesses simultaneously two velocities which are
v = Lt = represented in magnitude and direction by two sides of a
δt → 0 δ t dt parallelogram drawn from a point, their resultant is
Velocity is a vector quantity whereas speed is a scalar
represented in magnitude and direction by that diagonal
quantity.
of parallelogram which passes through that point.
l Resolved
uuur Parts of a Velocity: If the velocity of a particle l Resultant of two velocities inclined at a given angle to
v = OP, which makes angle α with the x-axis and PL ⊥
y each other: Y
uuur dx
OX and OL = v cos α = and
dt P(x, y)
D C
dy
uuuur dy v
OM = v sin α = then dt
dt v w v
2 2 α x
2  dx   dy  L
v =   +  dx α
θ α
 dt   dt  dt A X
u B
Dynamics 213 214 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

2 2 l Acceleration of a moving particle in plane

 dx   dy 
w2 =   +  2 2
 dt   dt   d 2x  d 2 y
=  2  + 2 
or w2 = u2 + v2 + 2uv cos α  dt   dt 

⇒w= u 2 + v 2 + 2uv cos α VERTICAL MOTION UNDER GRAVITY

dy dy dt l Greatest Height obtained by a body projected vertically
and =
dx dx dt upwards with a given velocity

u sin α u2
⇒ tan θ = H=
u + v cos α 2g

UNIFORM ACCELERATION l Time to reach the greatest height

l Acceleration: Rate of change of its velocity is called u

acceleration. T=
g
dv δv
Acceleration = = Lt l If v is the velocity and s be the distance covered in time t,
dt δ t → 0 δ t then
dv d  ds  d 2 s dv
and =  = l = g, v = u + gt
dt dt  dt  dt 2 dt
l Parallelogram Law of Acceleration: If a moving particle [For the object thrown downwards]
has simultaneously two accelerations represented in
magnitude and direction by two adjacent sides of a dv
l = –g, v = u – gt
parallelogram drawn from a point, their resultant is dt
represented in magnitude and directions by that diagonal [For the object thrown vertically upward]
of parallelogram which passes through this point.
l v = u + at dv
l v = g [For the object thrown vertically downwards]
ds
1 2
l s = ut + at
2 dv
l v = –g [For the object thrown vertically upwards]
l v2 = u2 + 2as ds
where u is the initial velocity, v is the final velocity and s
is the distance transversed in time t by a particle moving ds
l v=
under acceleration a. dt
Dynamics 215 216 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

PROJECTILE 1 x2
y = x tan α – g⋅ 2
Y 2 u cos 2 α
 x
= x 1 −  tan α
 R
u
LAWS OF MOTION
u sin α
u l First Law of Motion: Everybody continues in its state of
P θ rest or of uniform motion in a straight line except in so far
as it is compelled by some external force to change its
state.
α l Second Law of Motion: The net force on a body is equal
O X
u cos α Q to the product of the mass of the body and the acceleration
l Velocity in the direction of OX after time t caused by the force.
F=m×a
dx
== u cos α l Third Law of Motion: Every action generates an equal
dt and opposite reaction.
l Velocity in the direction of OY after time t
d 2s
dy P = mf = m
= = u sin α – gt dt 2
dt
l If a body of mass m is placed on a horizontal plane which
dy dy dt is in motion with acceleration f vertically upward or down-
l Hence =
dx dx dt ward then reaction R between the body and the plane is
R = m(g + f ) or R = m(g – f )
u sin α − gt
and tan θ =
u cos α R

l Greatest height to reach a particular height

A B
u 2 sin 2 α
H=
2g
l Time of flight of a projective mg

2u sin α ds
T= l =v
g dt
l Horizontal range of a projectile dv
l = a or f
u 2 sin 2α dt
R= dv
g
l v = f ¨
l Equation of the curve described by the projectile ds
 218 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

where xi is the class mark

Lower Limit + Upper Limit
xi =
2
Example:
C.I. f x fx
Sir Ronald Fisher 0-10 2 5 10
(1890-1962) 10-20 1 15 15
CHAPTER - 14 20-30 4 25 100
∑f = 7 ∑ fx = 125
STATISTICS
∑ fx 125
STATISTICS ⇒ Mean = = = 17.8
∑f 7
l Arithmetic Mean (AM): It is the sum of all observations
in a series divided by the number of items consulting the Short-Cut Method to Find Mean
series and is usually denoted by x. Suppose you are given the class interval and frequency. First
If x1, x2, … xn be the given n numbers of observation then obtain the class mark (xi) of every class-interval. Choose arbitrarily
x1 + x2 +…+ xn the middle term or any term from xi and call it A, where A =
x= Assumed Mean. Find the deviation di = xi – A for consequent term.
n
n ∑ fd
Mean = A +
∑ xi ∑f
i =1
= Example:
n
where ∑ denotes the sum of n terms. C.I. f x d=x–A fd
l Mean for Grouped Data: When the value of x (variable) 0-10 2 5 –10 –20
∑ fi xi 10-20 1 15 = A 0 0
and f (frequency) is given the mean = x =
∑ fi 20-30 4 25 10 40
where fi = frequency of their respective observation xi. ∑f = 7 ∑fd = 20
l Mean for Grouped Frequency Distribution: When the ∑ fd
class interval (10-20, 20-30, …) and frequency of Mean = A +
respective class interval is given ∑f

∑ fi xi 20
Mean = = 15 +
∑ fi 7
Statistics 219 220 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

= 15 + 2.8 = 17.8 For n = odd

Step-Deviation Methods: Step deviation method is generally th
 n + 1
seen as a modification of short-cut method. The same procedure is Median =  value
 2 
followed except in place of di we find d1'
xi − A For n = even
where di' =
i n th
th
i Median = A.M. of
n 
and  + 1 term
∑ fd
Mean = A + ×i 2 2 
∑f
Weighted Mean: When weight of datas are assigned in Example: Find the median of
proportion of their relative importance, then we find the W.M. (a) 26, 4, 27, 11, 5
If w1, w2, … wn denote the weights for the variates x1, x2, … (b) 7, 2, 8, 1, 5, 4
xn respectively. Solution: (a) Arrange in ascending order
∑ wi xi 4, 5, 11, 26, 27
Weighted Mean =
∑ wi
Example: Since n = odd (5)
th
Subject (xi) Marks (wi) Weight  n + 1  5 +1
term = 
 2 
Median =  = 3rd term
Hindi 65 3  2 
English 72 2 Median = 11
Math 93 1 (b) Arrange the data in ascending order
65 × 3 + 72 × 2 + 93 × 1 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8
W.M. = Since n = 6 (even)
3 + 2 +1
th
194 + 144 + 93 432 n  n + 1
= = = 72 Median = A.M. of and  term
6 6 2  2 
Mean of Combined Set of Data: If M1 and M2 be the two = A.M. of 3rd and 4th term
means computed on n1 and n2 observations respectively. The mean
4+5
M of n1 + n2 observations of two groups taken together is given by = = 4.5
2
n1M1 + n2 M 2
M= Median of Descrete Series
n1 + n2
When raw datas are arranged in such a way that the number
Median arranged have their frequency written all together.
Median is the central value of data when arranged in ascending (i) Arrange the terms (datas) in ascending or descending
or descending order. order.
Statistics 221 222 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(ii) Prepare a cummulative frequency table (c.f.) Quartiles

Median = Variable (x) corresponding to c.f. just greater It simply divides the frequency in four equal parts. Q is the
N mid-way between the lower extreme and the median.
than .
2 Q1 = First Quartile or lower Quartile
x f c.f. Q2 = Median
4 2 2 Q3 = It is called the upper quartile and is in mid way
7 1 3 between the median and upper extreme.
9 3 6 Quartile for Discrete Series
11 4 10 (N +1) th
Qi = Value of i term where n = 1, 2, 3, …
∑ f = 10 4
Quartile for Continuous Series
Median = Variable corresponding to c.f. just greater than ∑ f/2.
th
Here ∑ f/2 = 5 and c.f. just greater than 5 is 6.  N
Qi = Value of i   term where i = 1, 2, 3, …
Hence, Median = 9  4

Median in Case of Continuous Frequency Distribution Quartile for Grouped Data

N  iN 
−C
 − C
Median = l + 2 ×i 4
×i
f Qi = l + for i = 1, 2, 3, …
f
where l = lower limit of median class
N 
N = ∑f  − C
4
f = frequency of median class i.e. for Q1 = l + ×i
f
i = length of median class
C = c.f. just above the median class.  3N 
 − C
The median class is determined by taking the C.I. 4 
corresponding to c.f. just greater than ∑ f/2. and Q3 = l + ×i
f
Example:
where l = lower limit of the class in which the particular value
C.I. f c.f. lies.
10-20 2 2
N = ∑ f = sum of frequency
20-30 1 3=C
C = c.f. of preceeding class in which the partition value
30-40 3=f 6 → Median Class
lies.
40-50 4 10
i = length of the class
N = ∑ f = 10
Statistics 223 224 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

1 STANDARD DEVIATION (S.D.)

Semi-Inter Quartile Range = (Q3 − Q1 ) Standard deviation is denoted by the small greek letter σ and
2
Percentile is defined as:
∑ (X − X)2
 iN  σ=
 − C N
100  If we square standard deviation we call it Variance.
Pi = l + ×i for i = 1, 2, 3, …
f i.e. σ2 = variance
Decile
Calculation of S.D. for Ungrouped Data
 iN  (i) When deviations are taken from actual mean
 − C
10 ∑(X − X) 2
Di = l + ×i for i = 1, 2, 3, … SD (σ) =
f N
Mode: It is the value which occurs most frequently in a set of (ii) When deviations are taken from assumed mean
observation. It is a point of maximum frequency. 2
∑d2  ∑d 
−
 N 
f1 − f 0 SD (σ) =
Mode = l + ×i N
2 f1 − f 0 − f 2
where d = X – A
where l = lower limit of modal class. (Modal class consists of Calculation of S.D. for Grouped Data
highest frequency)
In grouped frequency distribution, S.D. can be calculated using
f1 = frequency of modal class
2
f2 = frequency next to modal class ∑ f (X − X) 2 ∑ fd 2  ∑ fd 
σ= σ= −
 N 
OR
f0 = frequency preceeding modal class N N
i = length of modal class However the step deviation method is quite simple
2
C.I. f ∑ fd ′ 2  ∑ fd ′ 
σ= − ×i
10-20 2 f0 N  N 
20-30 12 f1 [Modal class (Highest frequency] X−A
where d ′ =
30-40 8 f2 i
40-50 3 and i = length of class interval

There is another formula to determine mode, when mean and σ

Coefficient of Variation = × 100, for series with equal
median are given. x
Mode = 3 × Median – 2 × Mean means.
Statistics 225 226 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

SKEWNESS Moments for Ungrouped Data

The term skewed refer to lack of symmetry. In a symmetrical (i) The rth moment of a variable x about the AM ( x ) is given
distribution the values of mean, median and mode are alike. by
i.e. Mean ≠ Median ≠ Mode 1
µ r = ∑ ( xi − x ) r
In a frequency distribution, the skewness is said to be positive N i
if the frequency curve has a longer tail on right hand side. (ii) The rth moment of a variable x about any arbitrary point
A is given by
1
µ r ′ = ∑ ( xi − x ) r
N i

M Md Mo Moments for Grouped Data

In a positively skewed distribution 1
Mean > Median > Mode
µr = ∑
N i
fi ( xi − x ) r

The skewness is said to be negative if the frequency curve 1

has a longer tail on left hand side. and µ r ′ = ∑
N i
f i ( xi − A) r

Express Central Moments in Terms of Moments About a

Point A
M Md Mo ∑ fi ( xi − x ) r 1
µr = = ∑ fi ( xi − x ) r
In a negatively skewed distribution N N i
Mean < Median < Mode 1
= ∑ f i [( xi − A) − ∆ ] when ∆ = x − A
l Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Skewness: N
Mean – Mode (x − x )
SKP =
S.D. (σ ) µ1 = ∑
N
l Bowley’s Coefficient of Skewness:
( x − x )2
Q + Q1 – 2Q 2 µ2 = ∑
SKB = 3 N
Q3 – Q1
( x − x )3
The coefficient varies between ±1. µ3 = ∑ and so on.
N
MOMENT Moments about arbitrary point when actual mean is in
fraction. Moments are first calculated about an arbitrary origin
Moments are popularly used to describe the characteristics
and then converted to moments about actual mean when deviations
of distribution.
are taken from arbitrary point.
Statistics 227 228 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

( x − A) (ii) Similarly, the rth central moment is given by

µ1′ = ∑
N ∑ fi ui r ( xi − x )
( x − A) 2 µ r = hr × , where ui =
µ 2′ = ∑ N h
N
Poission’s Beta and Gamma Coefficients
( x − A)3
µ 3′ = ∑ Beta Coefficients Gamma Coefficients
N
( x − A) 4 µ 32
µ 4′ = ∑ β1 = γ1 = β1 =
µ3
N 3
µ2 (µ 2 )3/ 2
Finding Central Moments from Moments About Arbitrary
µ4
Point β2 = γ2 = β 2 – 3
µ2
µ1 = 0
µ 2 = µ2' – (µ1')2 For a symmetric distribution β1 = 0
µ 3 = µ3' – 3µ1'µ 2' + 2(µ1')2 KURTOSIS
µ 4 = µ4' – 4µ2'µ 1' + 6µ2'µ1'2 + 3µ1'4 The degree of peakedness or flatness of the hump of a
Sheppard’s Corrections to Moments of Grouped Frequency frequency distribution curve related to a normal curve is called
Distribution Kurtosis. The measure of Kurtosis, denoted by β2, is defined as
While calculating the mean, variance and higher moments of µ4
the grouped frequency distribution, the frequencies are assumed β2 =
to be concentrated at the mid-values of the classes. This creates µ 22
errors in the values of the moments. Also we define γ2 = β2 – 3
h2 Case 1: When β2 = 3.
µ 2 (corrected) = µ 2 − , where h = class size
12 When β2 = 3, and γ2 = 0. The Kurtosis is called Mesokurtic
µ 3 (corrected) = µ3 curve.
1 7 4
µ 4 (corrected) = µ4 – µ 2 h2 + h Case 2: When γ2 > 0 i.e. β2 > 3.
2 240
The curve is said to be Leptokurtic. The Kurtosis of a lepto-
Effects of Change of Origin on Moments kurtic curve is said to be positive.
( xi − A)
(i) Let ui = , then xi = A + hui Leptokurtic Curve
h
Let µr' be the rth moment about x = A then
1 1 ∑ fi ui r
µ1r = ∑ fi ( xi − A)r = ∑ fi (hi ui )r = h r Mesokurtic Curve
N N N
Platykurtic Curve
∑ fi ui r xi − A
Hence µr = h r × , where ui =
N h
Statistics 229 230 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Case 3: When γ2 < 0 i.e. β2 < 3. Cov ( x, y )

=
The curve is called Platykurtic. The Kurtosis of a platykurtic Var ( x) ⋅ Var ( y )
curve is said to be negative. Rank Correlation
∑ 6d 2
CORRELATION AND REGRESSION σ=1–
n(n 2 − 1)
Random variables might be said to be correlated if they are
where ∑d 2 = Sum of squares of the difference of 2 ranks; and n is
not independent. the number of pairs of observations.
Co-variance: The co-variance between two variables x and Regression Analysis: In a statistical relationship, if the value
y taken as x1, x2, … xn and y1, y2, … yn is defined as of one variable is known, we can estimate the value of the another
∑ ( x − x )( y − y ) variable through a procedure known as regression analysis.
Cov (x, y) = l Regression Line of y on x: If value of x is known, then
n
the value of y can be found as
where, x and y are the mean of x and y series respectively.
Cov ( x, y ) σy
Coefficient of Correlation: The Karl-Pearson’s formula for y− y = (x − x ) = r(x − x )
σx 2
σx
the calculation of correlation is given by
l Regression line of x on y : It estimates x for the given
∑ ( x − x )( y − y ) value of y as
rxy =
∑( x − x )2 ⋅ ∑( y − y )2 Cov( x, y )
x− x = ( y − y )2
σy 2
where x, y, x and y have the ususal meaning
r σy
or x− x = ( y − y)
Another formula is σy
dx ⋅ dy l Regression coefficients of y on x
rxy =
∑ dx2 ⋅∑ dy 2 σy Cov ( x, y )
byx = r =
σx σx 2
where dx = x − x and dy = y − y l Regression coefficients of x on y
dx2 = ( x − x )2 and dy2 = ( y − y ) 2 σx Cov ( x, y )
bxy = r =
This can be further modified as σy σy 2
∑ dx ⋅ ∑ dy
∑ dx ⋅ dy − TYPES OF CORRELATION
rxy = n
(a) Perfect Correlation: If the two variable vary in such a
 2 ∑ dx  
2
2 ∑ dy 
2
manner that their ratio is always constant, then correlation
 ∑ dx − ⋅ ∑ dy −
 n   n  is said to be perfect.
(b) Positive Correlation: If an increase or decrease in one
Cov ( x, y ) variable corresponds to an increase or decrease in the
Also, rxy =
σx ⋅σy other, the correlation is said to positive.
Statistics 231 232 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(c) Negative Correlation: If an increase or decrease in one ad + c

variable corresponds to a decrease or increase in the other, and y =
1 − ac
the correlation is said to be negative.
(d) Standard Error of Prediction:
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT CORRELATION
∑( y − y p )2
COEFFICIENT Sy =
n
(i) The correlation coefficient (r) lies between –1 and +1. where y is the actual value and yp is the predicted value.
–1 ≤ r ≤ 1
(e) Standard Error of estimate of x is
(ii) The correlation is positive and perfect if r = +1
Perfect and Negative if r = –1 Sx = σ x 1 − r 2
Not Correlated if r = 0 i.e. x and y are independent (f) Standard Error of estimate of y is
2
Positive if r > 0 and negative if r < 0 Sy = σ y 1 − r
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT REGRESSION l Regression Equation of y on x is expressed as
COEFFICIENTS y = a + bx …(A)
where a and b are the two unknown constants.
(a) r = bxy ⋅ byx
The values of a and b can be determined by
(b) If byx > 1 then bxy < 1 ∑y = Na + b∑x …(i)
(c) bxy + byx > 2 bxy ⋅ byx ∑xy = a∑x + b∑x 2 …(ii)
Solving both the equation simultaneously, we find a and
(d) If the angle between line of regression is θ, then b. Put these value in Equation (A) to obtain desired
equation.
 1 − r 2   σx ⋅σy 
tan θ =   ⋅  l Regression equation of x on y is given by
 r   σ2 x + σ2 y 
x = a + by …(B)
(e) The product of lines of regression’s gradient is σ2y/σ2x.
To determine the value of a and b, solve simultaneously
IMPORTANT POINTS ON REGRESSION LINES ∑x = Na + b∑y
(a) If r = 0 ⇒ tan θ = not defined i.e. θ = π/2. ∑xy = a∑y + b∑y2
The regression lines are perpendicular to each other. and put the value of a and b so obtained in equation (B).
(b) If r = +1 or –1 then θ = 0, hence the regression lines are INDEX NUMBER
coincident. A measure of the change, relative to some specific base period
(c) If regression lines are y = ax + b and x = cy + d in some variable, such as the price, volume, or value of a
bc + d commodity, the gross national product, or the general level of
then x = prices. The index number 100, and the index number of any other
1 − ac period is in proportion with it.
Statistics 233 234 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

∑ pi Histogram: A graphical representation of class interval and

Price Index Number = × 100 frequency. To construct a histogram one divides the range of a
∑ p0
where ∑pi = Total of current year prices for various commodities. variable into successive interval (not necessarily of equal length)
and draws rectangles with the interval as bases and areas
∑p0 = Total of base year prices for various commodities. proportional to the frequencies for the classes described by the
∑ qi intervals.
l Quantity Index Number = × 100
∑ q0 Example:
∑qi = Total quantity in current year.
Class Interval Frequency
∑q0 = Total quantity in base year.
10-20 5
l Aggregate Expenditure Method
20-30 2
∑ p1q0
Cost of Living Index Number = × 100 30-40 3
∑ p0 q0
where p1q0 = product of current year price of various 40-50 7
commodities with base year weight 50-60 3
p0q0 = product of base year price with base year
weight. 60-70 4

GRAPH y
Bar Graph: A graph consisting of parrallel bars whose length
are proportional to certain quantities given in a set of data.
7
City Temperature
6
Delhi 35
Mumbai 25 5

Frequency
Calcutta 30 4
Madras 32
3
y
2
40
35
Temperature

32 1
30
30
D 25 M
0 x
E A 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
20 D
L
H R Frequency Polygon: Once histogram is complete, join the
10 A
I mid-point of the top sides of rectangles. The frequency polygon
S
0 x for the above example will be:
Statistics 235 236 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

y 360
1% = = 3.6º
100
360
7
⇒ 20% = × 20 = 72º
100
6
40% = 3.6 × 40 = 144º
5 10% = 3.6 × 10 = 36º

4
20% = 3.6 × 20 = 72º
10% = 3.6 × 10 = 36º
3
Item Expenditure Central Angle
2
Rent 20% 72º
1
Food 40% 144º
0 x Education 10% 36º
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Cloth 20% 72º
Pie-Chart: A circular diagram divided into sectors of which
the areas are proportional to the magnitudes of the quantities Other 10% 36º
represented. Draw a circle of any radius and divide it into different sectors
Item Expenditure with the given angles.
20%
Rent 20%
Food 40% 20%
Cloth
Education 10%
Cloth 20% 10%
Others 10% Rent
Education 72º
36º 72º
To draw the pie chart:
36º
(a) Sum up the data given. 144º
Other
(b) Find the central angle for each item.
10%
Data of Particular Row Food
Central Angle = × 360º
Total Value of Data
Here, Total value comes out to be 100%
100% = 360º
40%
Statistics 237

Ogive: A graph of cummulative frequency distribution. Ogive

can be constructed in less than or more than type. The point of
intersection of less than and more than ogive gives the median.
Class Interval Frequency Cummulative Frequency
0-10 2 2
10-20 3 2+3=5
Girolamo Cardano
20-30 1 5+1=6 (1501-1576)
30-40 5 6 + 5 = 11
CHAPTER - 15
40-50 4 11 + 4 = 15
50-60 7 15 + 7 = 22 PROBABILITY
N = 22
Construct the less than ogive by taking the upper limit of C.I.
STATISTICS
on x-axis and c.f. on y-axis. If in a random sequence of n trials of an event with m
Point (x, y) for the graph will be: favourable events the ratio m/n is called probability.
(10, 2) (20, 5) (30, 6) (40, 11) (50, 15) (60, 22) IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
(i) Sample Space: The set S of all possible outcomes of an
experiment is called sample space.
24
Example: (a) Sample space of throwing a dice = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
(60, 22)
21
(b) Sample space of throwing a coin = {H, T}
18 (ii) Event: An event is a subset of a sample space.
(50, 15)
15 (a) Coming out even number on throwing a dice = {2, 4, 6}
12 (40, 11) (b) Getting head on tossing a coin = {H}
9
(30, 6)
(iii) Mutually Exclusive Events: If two or more events have no
6 (20, 5) point in common they are said to be mutually exclusive. If A
3 (10, 2) and B are two events then they will be mutually exclusive if
A ∩ B = φ.
10 20 30 40 50 60
(iv) Equally Likely Events: Two events are said to be equally
Remember: If the range of data placed on x/y-axis are not likely if one of them cannot be expected to occur in preference
equal we use clique. to the other.
y (v) Exhaustive Observation: When every possible outcome of
an experiment is considered, the observation is called
o y ¨ exhaustive.
Probability 239 240 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Example: The total number of observation of throwing a (iv) If A and B are mutually exclusive events then
dice is 6 and S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) [³ P(A ∩ B) = 0]
(vi) Odds in favour of an event E to be a: b is (v) If A and B are independent events
a P(A ∩ B) = P(A).P(B)
P(E) =
a+b (vi) If A, B, C are three events independent of each other
(vii) Odds against E to be a : b is
P(A ∩ B ∩ C) = P(A).P(B).P(C)
b (vii) If A and B are two events such that B occurs only if A occurs
P(E) =
a+b then
(viii) Conditional Probability: If A and B are two events in a
P(A ∩ B)
sample space such that B occurs only if A has already occured P(B/A) =
then the occurance of B after the occurance of A is denoted P(A)
by P(B/A) and is called the conditional probability of B under (viii) If A and B are independent events then
the condition that A has already occured. (a) P(A ∩ B') = P(A).P(B')
Example: A family has 2 children, the probability that both (b) P(A' ∩ B) = P(A').P(B)
of them are boys, if it is known that one of them is a boy. (c) P(A' ∩ B') = P(A').P(B')
(ix) Independent Events: If two events occur such that the (d) P[(A ∪ B)'] = [1 – P(A)][1 – P(B)]
occurance of one does not depend upon that of the other,
(e) P(A ∪ B) = 1 – P(A').P(B')
they are said to be independent events.
(ix) If the probabilities of happening of n independent events be
If A and B are two events then
p1, p2, … pn respectively then
P(A ∩ B) = P(AB) = P(A).P(B)
(a) Probabilities of happening one of them
Example: When a coin is tossed, the coming out of head
= (1 – p1)(1 – p2) …… (1 – pn)
and tail are independent events.
(b) Probability of happening atleast one of them
IMPORTANT RESULT 1 – (1 – p1)(1 – p2) …… (1 – pn)
n(E) (x) If A and B are two events then
(i) P(E) =
n(S) P(A/B) + P(A'/B) = 1
Number of outcomes favourable to occurance of E (xi) In a well-suffled pack of playing cards, there are 52 cards.
= Out of them, there are
Number of all possible outcomes
(ii) 0 ≤ P(E) ≤ 1 (a) 4 Suits-Diamond (♦), Heart (♥), Spade (♠), Clubs (♣)
each having 13 cards.
(iii) If A and B are any two events then
(b) Face cards = Ace (4), King (4), Queen (4)
P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A ∩ B)
(c) Three are 26 black and 26 red cards.
Probability 241 242 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(xii) In tossing a coin, S = {H, T} (b) Poisson Distribution: In a random experiment, let p be
(xiii) In tossing 2 coins, S = {HH, HT, TH, TT} the probability of the occurance of an event and let n trials be
made in such a way that
(xiv) In tossing 3 coins, S = {HHH, HTH, THH, TTH, HHT, HTT,
THT, TTT} (i) p is very small i.e. p → 0
(xv) In throwing a die, S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} (ii) n is very large i.e. n → ∞
(xvi) In throwing 2 dice, number of sample space = 6 × 6 = 36, (iii) np is a finite constant equal to m, i.e. m = np.
S =  (1, 1) (2, 1) (3, 1) (4, 1) (5, 1) (6, 1) then the probability of occurance of this event r times is given by
 the poisson distribution as
 (1, 2) (2, 2) (3, 2) (4, 2) (5, 2) (6, 2)
 (1, 3) (2, 3) (3, 3) (4, 3) (5, 3) (6, 3) e− m ⋅ mr
 P(x = r) =
(1, 4) (2, 4) (3, 4) (4, 4) (5, 4) (6, 4)  r
 1 2
(1, 5) (2, 5) (3, 5) (4, 5) (5, 5) (6, 5) 
where e = 1 + + + … = 2.7183
(1, 6) (2, 6) (3, 6) (4, 6) (5, 6) (6, 6)  1! 2!
m = np
Here (1, 1) (2, 2) (3, 3) (4, 4) (5, 5) (6, 6) are called Doublet.
l Mean = np
DIFFERENT TYPES OF PROBABILITY
l Variance = np
DISTRIBUTION
l S.D. = np
(a) Binomial Distribution: If the probability of happening
of an event in single trial of an experiment be p, then the probability l Recurrance relation for the Poisson Distribution:
of happening of that event r times in trials is given by P(r + 1) m
=
P(x = r) = ncr pr qn – r P( r ) r +1
where p = probability of success (e) Normal Distribution: A random variable x is said to have
a normal distribution with parameter(s); µ (mean) and variance
q = probability of failure σ2, if its probability density function is given by
p+q=1 ( x −µ ) 2
1 σ2
l Mean = np f (x) = ⋅e
σ⋅ 2 π
l Variance = npq
where σ = S.D.
l Standard Deviation = npq π = 3.1416
l Reccurance relation for Binomial Distribution: 2π = 2.5066
P(X = r + 1) n − r p e = 2.7183
= ⋅
P(X = r ) r +1 q µ = Mean of random variable x.
Probability 243 244 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

The normal distribution with mean µ and variance σ2 is σ = 1 is said to have standard normal distribution. Its probability
denoted by N(µ, σ2). density function is given by
l If a random variable X has a normal distribution with mean 1 −z
2
x −µ
µ and variance σ2, then the random variable Z is defined f (Z) = ⋅e 2 where Z =
2π σ
by
P(a ≤ Z ≤ b) = area under the standard normal curve between
X −µ Z = a and Z = b.
Z=
σ
How to find Probability when Limits of SNV are given:
is called a standard normal variate which has mean (0)
and SD = 1. Let Z be a standard normal variable (SNV) N(0, 1).
(a) The area under the SNV between Z = 0 and Z = a can be
found from the Normal distribution table for Area.
(b) Total area under the SNV is 1 unit.
x=µ
(c) Z = 0 divides the area under the standard normal curve
X =aX =b into two equal parts. Area to the left of Z = 0 is 0.5 sq.
unit and area to the right of Z = 0 is 0.5 sq. unit.
For a normally distributed random variable X with mean
µ and variance σ2, the probability that X lies between a (d) P(a ≤ Z ≤ b) = area under the standard normal curve
and b is given by between Z = a and Z = b.
p(a < X < b) = area under the normal curve f (x) between (g) Baye’s Theorem: If H1, H2, …Hn form a set of mutually
X = a and X = b. exclusive and exhaustive events with non-zero probabilities of a
random experiment, and E is any other event of the same
l Area of normal curve lies as per details given below:
experiment with P(E) > 0
68% of the area falls between X = µ – σ and X = µ + σ  E
95.5% of the area falls between X = µ – 2σ and X = µ + 2σ P   ⋅ P(Hi )
H 
n
 Hi 
99.7% of the area falls between X = µ – 3σ and X = µ + 3σ P i  = ∑
 E  i=1  E 
P   ⋅ P(Hi )
 Hi 
(h) Random Variable: Let S be a sample space associated
with a given random experiment. A real valued function X which
assigns to each wi ∈ S, a unique real number X(wi) = xi is called a
random variable.
µ – 3σ µ – 2σ µ – σ µ + σ µ + 2σ µ + 3σ (i) Probability Distribution of a Random Variable: A
description giving the values of the random variable along with
(f) Standard normal distribution or Z-distribution: A the corresponding probabilities is called the probability distribution
random variable Z which has a normal distribution with µ = 0 and of the random variable.
Probability 245

Example: Probability distribution of number of heads, when

two coins are tossed.
S = {HH, HT, TH, TT}
P(X = 0) = Probability that no head comes is TT.
P(X = 1) = One head comes is HT or TH.
P(X = 2) = Two head come is HH.
George Cantor
Here
(1845-1918)
1
P(X = 0) =
4 CHAPTER - 16

P(X = 1) =
2
SET THEORY
4
3 Set: A set is a collection of well-defined and distinct objects.
P(X = 2) =
4 A = {Months of Year}
Hence the probability distribution of the above problem if: B = {Alphabets of English}
X 0 1 2 METHOD TO WRITE SET
1 2 3 (a) Roster Method: When the elements of a set is written
P(X) inside braces i.e. { }
4 4 4
(i) {2, 4, 6, 8}
l Mean = ∑ xipi, where pi the probability for xi.
(ii) {Jan, Feb, March}
l Variance = ∑pixi2 – (∑pixi)2
(b) Set Builder Method/Rule Method: Many a times, the
¨ number of elements of a set is infinite and set builder
method helps us to write the elements.
A = {x : x is a natural number}
Kinds of Set
(a) Singleton Sets: Sets having one and only one element.
A = {a}.
(b) Pair Set: A set having two elements only.
A = {1, 2}
(c) Finite Set: A set having countable number of elements.
A = {a, b, … y, z}
B = {1, 2, 3, 4 … 10}
Set Theory 247 248 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(d) Infinite Set: A set having infinite number of elements. U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, … 100]
A = {1, 2, …} A = {3, 4, 5, 6}
(e) Null Set: A set having no element. It is denoted by φ B = {10, 20, 30, … 100}
A = {All married bachelor} A ⊂ U, B ⊂ U
B = {x : x ∈ N, x2 + 11x + 18 = 0} ALGEBRA OF SETS
(f) Equal Sets: Two sets A and B are said to be equal if they (a) Union of Two Sets: Let A and B be two sets. The Union
have exactly the same elements and we write A = B. of two sets A and B is the set which consists of all the
Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4} elements of A and all the elements of B, the common
B = {2, 4, 3, 1} element is taken only once. It is denoted by A ∪ B.
then A = B. Example: A = {1, 3, 5, 7}
(g) Subsets: A set A is said to be a subset of a set B if every B = {2, 4, 6, 8}
elements of A is also an elements of B. A ∪ B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}
i.e. if a ∈ A ⇒ a ∈ B (b) Intersection of Two Sets: The intersection of sets A and
i.e. A ⊂ B. B is the set of all elements which are common to both A
and B. It is denoted by A ∩ B.
i.e. A is a subset of B.
Example: A = {1, 3, 5, 7}
If a is an elements of A implies a is also an element of B.
B = {2, 3, 4, 5}
A = {1, 3, 5}
A ∩ B = {3, 5}
B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
(c) Disjoint Set: If the intersection of two sets A and B comes
⇒A⊂B
out to be null, it is called disjoint i.e. A ∩ B = φ.
(h) Proper Subset: If A ⊂ B and A ≠ B, then A is called the
Example: Let A = {1, 2, 3}
proper subset of B and B is called the superset of A.
B = {4, 5, 6}
A = {1, 2, 3} is a proper subset of B = {1, 2, 3, 4}
A∩B={}=φ
(i) Power Set: The collection of all subsets of a set A is
called the power set of A. It is denoted by P(A). (d) Difference of Sets: The difference of the sets A and B in
this order is the set of elements which belongs to A but
If A = {a, b}
not to B.
P(A) = {{a}, {b}, {a, b}, φ}
Example: A = {1, 2, 3, 4}
i.e. If A has n element then
B = {2, 4}
n[P(A)] = 2n = Number of elements of a subset.
A – B = {1, 2, 3, 4} – {2, 4}
(j) Universal Set: Universal set is the set of all the sets. The
= {1, 3}
universal set is generally denoted by U.
Set Theory 249 250 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(e) Complement of a Set: Let U be a universal set and A a Cartesian Product of Two Sets: For the two sets A and B
subset of U; then complement of A is the set of all elements the cartesian product is the set of all ordered pair of element from
of U which are not the elements of A. Symbolically it is A and B.
denoted by A'. A × B = {(a, b) : a ∈ A and b ∈ B}
Example: U = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7} Example: Let A = {1, 2}
If A = {2, 4, 6} ⇒ A' = {1, 3, 5, 7} B = {3, 4}
VENN DIAGRAM A × B = {(1, 3) (1, 4) (2, 3) (2, 4)}
Y
∪ ∪ (1, 4) (2, 4)
4

A B A B (1, 3) (2, 3)
3

(i) A ∪ B (ii) A ∩ B 1

∪ ∪ 0 X
B 1 2 3 4
n(A × B) = n(A) × n(B)
A B A
FUNCTION
Let x and y be two non-empty sets. A subset f of X × Y is
called a function from X and Y iff to each x ∈ X, ∃ a unique y in
(iii) A – B (iv) B – A
Y such that (x, y) ∈ f. The mapping or function is denoted by
f:X→Y
∪ ∪ Kinds of Mapping/Function
(a) Equal Functions: Two functions f : X → Y and g : X → Y
A A B are said to be equal iff f (x) = g(x) for every x ∈ X and we
write f = g.
(b) Identity Function: Let Ix : X → X defined by
Ix(x) = x ∀ x ∈ X
A' Disjoint Set A and B then Ix is called the identity mapping on A.
Set Theory 251 252 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(c) Many One Mapping: Let f : X → Y be a function. The f

X Y
function f is said to be many one iff two or more different a 1
elements in X have the same f-image in Y.
b 2
f c 3
X
A YB 4
a 1
d 54
b (f) Onto Mapping: The mapping f is said to be onto if every
2 elements in Y is the f-image of at least one element in X.
c
Onto mapping is also called surjection.
d 3 X Y
a 1
(d) One-One Mapping: The mapping f is said to be one-one
b 2
iff different elements in X have different f-image in Y.
c 3
i.e. If x1 ≠ x2
f (x1) ≠ f (x2) d 4

and If x1 = x2 (e) Domain, Co-domain and Range: Let us consider the

following example.
f (x1) = f (x2) f
A B
one-one mapping is also called injection. a
1
b
f 2
X Y c
1 a 3
d
2 b 4 e
3 c 5 f
Here A = {1, 2, 3, 4,5 } is the domain
4 d
B = {a, b, c, d, e, f} is the co-domain
(e) Into Mapping: The mapping f is said to be into, if there and 1 → a, 2 → b, 3 → d, 4 → f, 5 → c is called the
is at least one element in Y, which is not the f image of range.
any element in X. (f) Composite Function: For the function f and g
Set Theory 253 254 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

( fog)(x) = f [g(x)]
l dom  f1 ( x )  = D1 ∩ {x : f1(x) > 0}
and (gof )(x) = g[ f (x)]  

RANGE AND DOMAIN OF A FUNCTION CLOSED AND OPEN INTERVAL

If the function y = f (x) is defined for a < x < b, then the open l If a ≤ x ≤ b, x ∈ [a, b] — Closed Interval
interval ]a, b[ will constitute the domain; if f (x) is also defined l If a < x < b, x ∈ ]a, b[ or x ∈ (a, b) — Open Interval
both for x = a and b, then domain will consist of the closed interval
[a, b] l a ≤ x < b, x ∈ [a, b[ or x ∈ [a, b) — Semi Closed or Open
Range f (x) = { y : y = f (x), x ∈ domain} l a < x ≤ b, x ∈ ]a, b] or (a, b] — Semi Open or Closed

Function Domain Range (Refer Inequality for more details)

l y = loga x, x > 0 R+ or ]0, ∞[ or (0, ∞) R or ]–∞, ∞[ or (–∞, ∞) MODULUS

l y= ex R R+ l |x| = x if x ≥ 0
l y = sin x, y = cos x R [–1, 1] = –x if x < 0
 π π
l |x – a| = x – a if x – a ≥ 0
l y = sin–1 x [–1, 1] − 2 , 2 

= –(x – a) if x – a < 0
l y = cos–1 x [–1, 1] [0, π]
π l |x|2 = x2
l y = tan x R – {(2n + 1) , R
2 x x
n ∈ I} l =
y y
l y = tan–1 x  π π
− 2 , 2 
R
  l x − y ≤ x+ y ≤ x + y
l y = cot x R – {nπ : n ∈ I} R l xy = x y
π
l y = sec x D = R – {(2n + 1) , ]–∞, –1[ ∪ [ 1, ∞[ PERIODIC FUNCTION
2
n ∈ I} l If f (x + λ) = f (x) ∀ x, λ > 0, then f (x) is called a periodic
l y = cosec x D = R – {nπ, n ∈ I} ]–∞, –1[ ∪ [1, ∞[ function.
IMPORTANT FORMULA FOR DOMAIN f (x + λ) = f (x + 2λ) = f (x + 3λ)… = f (x)
l dom [ f1(x) + f2(x)] = D1 ∩ D2 Here, λ, 2λ, 3λ, … are all periods of f (x) but λ will be
l dom [ f1(x).f2(x)] = D1 ∩ D2 called the fundamental period.
 f ( x)  λ
l dom  1  = D1 ∩ D2 {x : f2(x) ≠ 0} l If period of f (x) = λ then period of f (ax + b) = .
 f 2 ( x)  a
Set Theory 255 256 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Period of f (x) + g(x) (iii) Modulus Function: A functon f : x → y defined by

l p f (x) = |x| = x for x > 0
If period of f (x) = and g(x) = where l, m p, q are co-
m q = – x for x < 0
prime then period of f (x) + g(x) is given by is called modulus function.
y
LCM of (l , p ) of N r
= 4
HCF of (m, q ) of D r
3
IMPORTANT FUNCTIONS
2
(i) Identity Function: A function f : x → x is called an
identity function, if 1
y
3 x' x
–2 –1 O 1 2 3
y = f(x) = x
2 –1

x' x y'
–2 –1
O
1 2 3 (iv) Signum Function: A function f : x → y defined as
–1  1 if x > 0

–2 f (x) =  0 if x = 0
 –1 if x < 0
y' 
(ii) Constant Function: A function f : x → y is called a is called signum function.
constant function if, for some y ∈ Y, f (x) = y0 for every y
x ∈ X.
y
21 y=1
2 y=2

1 x' x
O
x' x
–2 –1 O 1 2 3
–1 y = –1 –1

–2

y' y'
Set Theory 257 258 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

(v) Greatest Integer Function: The function f : x → y (c) Equivalence Relation: A relation R in a set A is said to
defined by f (x) = [x], x ∈ X assumes the value of the be an equivalence relation if R is
greatest integer, less than or equal to xi is called greatest (a) Reflexive: aRa; ∀ a ∈ A.
integer function.
(b) Symmetric: aRb ⇒ bRa; ∀ a, b ∈ A.
[x] = –1 if –1 ≤ x < 0
(c) Transative: aRb, and bRc ⇒ aRc; ∀ a, b, c ∈ A.
[x] = 0 if 0 ≤ x < 1
[x] = 1 if 1 ≤ x < 2 IMPORTANT RESULTS
[x] = 2 if 2 ≤ x < 3 (i) (A ∪ B) = B ∪A — Commutative law for unions.
y (ii) (A ∪ B) ∪ C = A ∪ (B ∪ C)
— Associative law for unions.
3
(iii) A ∪ φ = A — Identity law
2
(iv) A ∪ A = A — Idempotent law
1 (v) A ∩ B = B ∩ A — Commutative law for intersection.
x' x (vi) A ∩ A' = U and A ∩ A' = φ — Complement law.
–3 –2 –1 1 2 3 4 5
(vii) A ∩ (B ∪ C) = (A ∩ B) ∪ (A ∩ C) 
–1
A ∪ (B ∩ C) = (A ∪ B) ∩ (A ∪ C) 
Distributive law
–2
(viii) (A ∪ B)' = A' ∩ B' 
De-Morgan’s law
–3 (A ∩ B)' = A' ∪ B' 
(ix) (A')' = A — Double complement law
y'
(x) n(A ∪ B) = n(A) + n(B) – n(A ∩ B)
RELATION
(xi) n(A – B) + n(A ∩ B) = n(A)
A relation R from a non-empty set A to a non-empty set B is a
subset of cartesian product A × B. If (a, b) ∈ R, we say a is related (xii) n(B – A) + n(A ∩ B) = n(B)
to b under the relation R and we write aRb. (xiii) n(A ∪ B) = n(A – B) + n(A ∩ B) + n(B – A)
(xiv) n(A ∪ B ∪ C) = n(A) + n(B) + n(C) – n(A ∩ B) –
TYPES OF RELATION
n(B ∩ C) – n(A ∩ C) + n(A ∩ B ∩ C)
(a) Empty Relation: A relation R in a set A is called empty
relation if no element of A is related to any element of A ¨
i.e. R = φ ⊂ A × A.
(b) Universal Relation: A relation R in a set A is called
universal relation if each element of A is related to every
element of A i.e. R = A × A.
 260 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

AB P BC
tan θ = = tan α =
BC H AB
BC B AB
cot θ = = cot α =
AB P BC
AC H AC
sec θ = = sec α =
BC B AB
Hipparchus AC H AC
(190-120 BC) cosec θ = = cosec α =
AB P BC
CHAPTER - 17 where P = Perpendicular
B = Base
TRIGONOMETRY and H = Hypotenuse
The six trigonometric Ratios can be summarised in the
INTRODUCTION following table:
In a right angled triangle, the relation between Perpendicular sin cos tan
(p), Base (b) and Hypotenuse (h) can be established with the Pandit Badri Prasad
following trigonometric ratios.
A Hari Hari Bol
α cosec sec cot
The capital word, if written in a tabular form, it will look like:
H sin cos tan
P B P
θ H H B
B C
cosec sec cot
l The side opposite to 90º is Hypotenuse (H).
This can also be written as:
l The perpendicular is the side opposite to the angle
Some People Have Curly Brown Hair Towards Pulled Back
concerned.
Here, S, C and T represent sin, cos and tan of the angle and P,
For angle (θ); AB is the perpendicular, whereas for angle (α), H and B are Perpendicular, Hypotenuse and Base respectively.
BC is the perpendicular.
From the above table, three relations can be drawn. They are:
AB P BC
sin θ = = sin α = sin θ.cosec θ = 1
AC H AC
BC B AB cos θ.sec θ = 1
cos θ = = cos α =
AC H AC tan θ.cot θ = 1
Trigonometry 261 262 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l Two angles are said to be complementary to each other

if their sum is 90º. Now let us learn the six formulae based 1 1 3
= 0 1
on the complementary properties: 2
2 2
sin θ = cos (90 – θ) The above extract is the value of sin 0º, sin 30º, sin 45º sin 60º
cos θ = sin (90 – θ) and sin 90º. The value of cosine of an angle can be extracted by
sin θ = cos (90 – θ) and that of tangent can be obtained by using
tan θ = cot (90 – θ)
cot θ = tan (90 – θ) sin θ
tan θ = .
sec θ = cosec (90 – θ) cos θ
cosec θ = sec (90 – θ) 0º 30º 45º 60º 90º
l Basic Relation between the six trigonometric Ratios: 1 1 3
sin 0 1
sin2 θ + cos2 θ = 1 2 2 2
sec2 θ – tan2 θ = 1 3 1 1
cosec2 θ – cot2 θ = 1 cos 1 0
2 2 2
sin θ 1
tan θ = tan 0 1 3 ∞
cos θ 3
This can be further extended as: 1
cos2 θ = 1 – sin2 θ cot ∞ 3 1 0
3
sin2 θ = 1 – cos2 θ
2
sec2 θ = 1 + tan2 θ sec 1 2 2 ∞
tan2 θ = sec2 θ – 1 3
cosec2 θ = 1 + cot2 θ 2
cot2 θ = cosec2 θ – 1 cosec ∞ 2 2 1
3
cos θ SYSTEM OF UNITS USED TO MEASURE ANGLE
and cot θ =
sin θ
There are three systems of measuring an angle:
MEASUREMENT OF ANGLES (0º TO 90º) (i) English system or Sexagesimal System
Let us learn how to prepare the trigonometric table: (ii) French System or Centesimal System
l Write 0 1 2 3 and 4. (iii) Circular System
l Divide each of them by 4 and then take out the square root 1. English System:
of each. 1 Right angle = 90º
0 1 2 3 4 1º = 60 minutes = 60'
4 4 4 4 4 1' = 60 seconds = 60"
Trigonometry 263 264 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

2. French System: y
1 Right angle = 100 grades = 100g II I
S A
1 grade = 100 minutes = 100' (sin/cosec +ive) (All +ive)
1 minute = 100 seconds = 100" 90 + θ 90 – θ
3. Circular System: In circular system, the unit of 180 – θ
measurement is radian. One radian is angle made by an x' x
O
arc of length equal to radius of a given circle, at the centre. III IV
T C
(tan/cot +ive) (cos/sec +ive)
180 + θ 270 + θ
270 – θ 360 – θ

y'
c
1 r l For 90 ± θ, 270 ± θ, trigonometric function changes into
r sin ↔ cos, tan ↔ cot and sec ↔ cosec
l For 180 ± θ and 360 ± θ, No changes
l sin (–θ) = – sin θ cosec (–θ) = –cosec θ
cos (–θ) = cos θ sec (–θ) = sec θ
180º = π Radian = πc
tan (–θ) = –tan θ cot (–θ) = –cot θ
180º
1 radian = = 57º 16' 45" (approx.) Angle 0º 30º 45º 60º 90º 120º 135º 150º 180º 270º 360º
π
π 1 1 3 3 1 1
1 degree = Radian = 0.01746 radian sin 0 1 0 –1 0
180 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 1 1 1 1 3
MEASUREMENT OF ANGLES IN DIFFERENT cos 1 0 − − − –1 0 1
QUADRANT 2 2 2 2 2 2

Learn the following lines 1 1

tan 0 1 3 ∞ − 3 –1 − 0 ∞ 0
(i) Add Sugar To Coffee 3 3

(ii) After School To College 1st Quadrant

(iii) All Silver Tea Cups sin (90 – θ) = cos θ
In all the above lines cos (90 – θ) = sin θ
A = All S = sin T = tan and C = cos tan (90 – θ) = cot θ
Trigonometry 265 266 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

2nd Qudrant l The period of a cosn x + b sinn x is 2π if n is odd.

sin (90 + θ) = cos θ sin (180 – θ) = sin θ
l Maximum value of a cos θ + b sin θ + C is C + a 2 + b 2
cos (90 + θ) = –sin θ cos (180 – θ) = –cos θ
tan (90 + θ) = –tan θ tan (180 – θ) = –tan θ
Minimum value of cos θ + b sin θ + C is C − a 2 + b 2
[Value of sin θ, cosec θ are only +ive]
3rd Quadrant TRIGONOMETRIC RESULT ON SUM/
sin (180 + θ) = –sin θ sin (270 – θ) = –cos θ DIFFERENCE OF ANGLES
cos (180 + θ) = – cos θ cos (270 – θ) = –sin θ l sin (A + B) = sin A.cos B + cos A.sin B
tan (180 + θ) = tan θ tan (270 – θ) = cot θ l sin (A – B) = sin A.cos B – cos A.sin B
[Value of tan θ, cos θ are +ive] l cos (A + B) = cos A.cos B – sin A.sin B
4th Quadrant l cos (A – B) = cos A.cos B + sin A.sin B
sin (270 + θ) = –cos θ sin (360 – θ) = –sin θ tan A + tan B
l tan (A + B) =
cos (270 + θ) = sin θ cos (360 – θ) = cos θ 1 − tan A.tan B
tan (270 + θ) = –cot θ tan (360 – θ) = –tan θ tan A − tan B
l tan (A – B) =
[Value of cos θ/sec θ are +ive in 4th quadrant] 1 + tan A.tan B
Summary of Angles in Different Quadrant cot A ⋅ cot B –1
l cot (A + B) =
Angle –θ 90 – θ 90 + θ 180 – θ 180 + θ 270 – θ 270 + θ 360 – θ 360 + θ cot A + cot B
Function
cot A.cot B +1
Sin θ –sin θ cos θ cos θ sin θ –sin θ –cos θ –cos θ –sin θ sin θ l cot (A – B) =
cos θ cos θ sin θ –sin θ –cos θ –cos θ –sin θ sin θ cos θ cos θ cot B − cot A
tan θ –tan θ cot θ –cot θ –tan θ tan θ cot θ –cot θ –tan θ tan θ
l sin (A + B + C) = sin A.cos B.cos C + cos A.sin B.cos C +
cos A.cos B.sin C – sin A.sin B.sin C
PERIODICITY AND EXTREME VALUES l cos (A + B + C) = cos A.cos B.cos C – sin A sin B cos C –
l If f (x + K) = f (x), then f (x) is called a periodic function sin A cos B sin C – cos A.sin B.sin C
with period K. l tan (A + B + C)
l The period of sin x, cos x, sec x, cosec x is 2π.
tan A + tan B + tan C – tan A ⋅ tan B ⋅ tan C
l The period of tan x, cot x is π. =
1 − tan A ⋅ tan B − tan B ⋅ tan C – tan C ⋅ tan A
π l sin (A + B).sin (A – B) = sin2 A – sin2 B = cos2 B – cos2 A
l The period of a cosn x + b sinn x is if a = b and n is +ive
2
l cos (A + B).cos (A – B) = cos2 A – sin2 B = cos2 B – sin2 A
even.
2 tan θ
l The period of a cosn x + b sinn x is π if a ≠ b and n is +ive l sin 2θ = 2sin θ.cos θ =
even. 1 + tan 2 θ
Trigonometry 267 268 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l cos 2θ = cos2 θ – sin2 θ θ

= 2 cos2 –1
=2 cos2 θ–1 2
= 1 – 2 sin2 θ θ
1 − tan 2
2
1 − tan 2 θ
= = 2 θ
1 + tan 2 θ 1 + tan
2
2 tan θ
l tan 2θ = θ
1 − tan 2 θ 2 tan
l tan θ =
2
l 1 + cos 2θ = 2 cos2 θ θ
1 − tan 2
l 1 – cos 2θ = 2 sin2 θ 2
l sin 3θ = 3 sin θ – 4 sin3 θ θ
l 1 + cos θ = 2 cos2
l cos 3θ = 4 cos3 θ – 3 cos θ
2
θ
l 1 – cos θ = 2 sin2
3tan θ − tan 3 θ 2
l tan 3θ =
1 − 3tan 2 θ 1 − cos θ θ
l = tan
3
cot θ − 3cot θ sin θ 2
l cot 3θ =
3cot 2 θ − 1 1 + cos θ θ
l = cot
1 sin θ 2
l sin3 θ = (3 sin θ – sin 3θ) 1 + cos θ θ
4 l = cot 2
1 − cos θ 2
1
l cos3 θ = (3 cos θ + cos 3θ)
4 1 − cos θ θ
l = tan 2
HALF ANGLE FORMULA 1 + cos θ 2
θ θ PRODUCT INTO SUM OR DIFFERENCE
l sin θ = 2 sin .cos
2 2 l 2 sin A.cos B = sin (A + B) + sin (A – B)
θ
2 tan l 2 cos A.sin B = sin (A + B) – sin (A – B)
l sin θ =
2
2 θ l 2 cos A.cos B = cos (A + B) + cos (A – B)
1 + tan
2 l 2 sin A.sin B = cos (A – B) – cos (A + B)
θ θ
l cos θ = cos2 – sin2 SUM AND DIFFERENCE INTO PRODUCT
2 2
2 θ  A + B  A − B
= 1 – 2 sin l sin A + sin B = 2sin  ⋅ cos 
2  2   2 
Trigonometry 269 270 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

 A + B  A − B l tan 15º = 2 – 3 = cot 75º

l sin A – sin B = 2cos 
  ⋅ sin  
2 2  l cot 15º = 2 + 3 = tan 75º
 A + B  A − B
l cos A + cos B = 2cos 
  ⋅ cos   INVERSE CIRCULAR FUNCTIONS
2 2 
If sin θ = x
 A + B  A − B ⇒ sin–1 x = θ
l cos A – cos B = − 2sin   ⋅ sin 
 2   2  sin–1 x, cos–1 x, tan–1 x, … etc. are called Inverse Circular
sin (A + B) π Functions.
l tan A + tan B = where A, B ≠ nπ + , n ∈ Z
cos A ⋅ cos B 2 l sin–1 x and cos–1 x are defined if |x| ≤ 1
l tan–1 x and cot–1 x are defined if ∀ x ∈ R
sin (A − B) π
l tan A – tan B = where A, B ≠ nπ + , n ∈ Z l sec–1 x and cosec–1 x are defined for |x| ≥ 1
cos A ⋅ cos B 2
sin (A + B) Domain and Range of Principal Value Branches
π
l cot A + cot B = where A, B ≠ nπ + , n ∈ Z
sin A ⋅ sin B 2 Inverse Domain Range
sin (B – A) π  π π
l cot A – cot B = where A, B ≠ nπ + , n ∈ Z sin–1 [–1, 1]
 − 2 , 2 
sin A ⋅ sin B 2
cos–1 [–1, 1] [0, π]
IMPORTANT RESULTS ON ANGLES
 π π
5 −1 tan–1 R  − , 
l sin 18º = = cos 72º 2 2
4
cot–1 R (0, π)
10 − 2 5
l sin 36º = = cos 54º π 
4 sec–1 R – (–1, 1) [0, π] –  
2
5 +1
l sin 54º = = cos 36º cosec–1  π π  – {0}
 − 2 , 2 
4 R – (–1, 1)

10 + 2 5 CONVERSION OF INVERSE CIRCULAR

l sin 72º = = cos 18º
4 FUNCTION
3 −1 x
l sin 15º = = cos 75º l sin–1 x = cos–1 1 − x 2 = tan–1
2 2 1 − x2
3 +1 2 1 − x2
l cos 15º = = sin 75º l cos–1 x = sin–1 1− x = tan–1
2 2 x
Trigonometry 271 272 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

l tan–1 x = sin–1
x
= cos–1
1  x− y 
l tan–1 x – tan–1 y = tan–1  
1 + xy 
2
1 − x2 1+ x
2x 2x 1 − x2
IDENTITIES l 2 tan–1 x = tan–1 = sin–1 = cos–1
1 − x2 1 + x2 1 + x2
l sin–1 (sin θ) = θ sin (sin–1 θ) = θ
l cos–1 (cos θ) = θ cos (cos–1 θ) = θ {
l 2 sin–1 x = sin–1 2 x 1 − x
2
}
l tan–1 (tan θ) = θ tan (tan–1 θ) = θ l 2 cos–1 x= cos–1 (2x2 – 1)
π
l sin–1 θ + cos–1 θ = l sin–1 x = cosec–1
1
2 x
π 1
l sec–1 x + cosec–1 x = l cos–1 x = sec–1
2 x
π 1
l tan–1 x + cot–1 x = l tan–1 x = cot–1
2 x

{ } if x ≥ 0, sin (–x) = –sin–1 x

l –1
2 2
l sin–1 x + sin–1 y = sin–1 x 1 − y + y 1 − x
l cos–1 (–x) = π – cos–1 x
y ≥ 0, x2 + y2 ≤ 1 l tan–1 (–x) = –tan–1 x

{ } if x ≥ 0 , y ≥ 0, x + y > 1
= π – sin–1 x 1 − y 2 + y 1 − x 2 2 2 l
l
cot–1 (–x) = π – cot–1 x
sec–1 (–x) = π – sec–1 (x)

x – sin y = sin { x − 1− y − y 1− x } 2 2 l cosec–1 (–x) = –cosec–1 (x)

l sin–1 –1 –1

PROPERTIES OF TRIANGLE
l cos–1 x + cos y = cos { xy − 1 − x 1 − y }
–1 –1 2 2 In a triangle ABC
A+B+C=π

x – cos y = cos { xy + 1 − x 1 − y } 2 2 l sin (B + C) = sin (π – A) = sin A

l cos–1 –1 –1
l cos (C + A) = cos (π – B) = –cos B
[ x + y] l tan (A + B) = tan (π – C) = – tan C etc.
l tan–1 x + tan–1 y = tan–1 if x > 0, y = 0 and xy < 1
1 − xy Similarly,

 x+ y   A + B  π C C
= π + tan–1  sin  = sin  −  = cos
 if x > 0, y > 0 and xy > 1  2   2 2 2
1 − xy 
 x+ y   B + C  π A A
= –π + tan–1   if x < 0, y < 0 and xy > 1 cos   = cos  −  = sin etc.
1 − xy   2   2 2 2
Trigonometry 273 274 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Trigonometric Relations Between Sides and Angles 1

∆= bc sin A
a b c 2
l = = = 2R where R = Circum Radius 1
sin A sin B sin C [Sine Rule] = ac sin B
2
b2 + c2 − a2  1
l cos A =
2bc  = ba sin C
 2
a 2 + c2 − b2  l ∆= S(S − a )(S − b)(S − c )
l cos B =  Cosine Rule
2ac  where 2S = a + b + c
2 2 2 
a +b −c  Ratio Formula
l cos C = 
2ab In the ∆ABC, AD divides BC in the ratio of m : n.
l a = b cos C + c cos B
A
b = c cos A + a cos C
c = a cos B + b cos A α β

A 
(S − b)(S − c)
l sin = 
2 bc

A S(S − a ) 
cos =  where 2S = a + b + c θ
2 bc  B C
m D n

A (S − b )(S − c )  If ∠BAD = α
tan =
2 S(S − a )  ∠CAD = β
A–B a−b C  ∠ADB = θ, then
l tan = cot
2 a+b 2  (m + n) cot θ = n cot β – m cot α

B–C b−c A  (m + n) cot θ = m cot C – n cot β
l tan = cot  Napier’s Formulae
2 b+c 2  Circum-radius, In-radius, and Ex-radii
 In the ∆ABC, let R = circum-radius, r = in-radius and the
C–A c−a B 
l tan = cot
2 c+a 2  three ex-radii corresponding to the vertices A, B and C be r1, r2
and r3 respectively, then
Area of a Triangle
abc a
l If the area of a ∆ABC is denoted by ∆ then R= =
4∆ 2sin A
Trigonometry 275 276 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

∆ A l sin h(ix) = i sin x

l r= = (S – a) tan
S 2 l cos h(ix) = cos x
B l tan h(ix) = i tan x
= (S – b) tan
2 l sin h(x + y) = sin hx.cos hy + cos hx.sin hy
C
= (S – c) tan l sin h(x – y) = sin hx.cos hy – cos hx.sin hy
2
A B C l cos h(x + y) = cos hx.cos hy + sin hx.sin hy
= 4R sin sin sin l cos h(x – y) = cos hx.cos hy – sin hx.sin hy
2 2 2
∆ A l cos h2x = cos h2x + sin h2x
l r1 = = S tan
S– a 2 = 2 cos h2x –1
A B C = 1 + 2 sin h2x
= 4R sin cos cos
2 2 2
1 + tan h 2 x
∆ B =
l r2 =
S–b
= S tan
2 1 − tan h 2 x
B C A l sin h2x = 2 sin hx.cos hx
= 4 R sin cos cos
2 2 2 2 tan hx
∆ C =
l r3 = = S tan 1 − tan h 2 x
S–c 2
C A B 2 tan hx
= 4R sin cos cos l tan h2x =
2 2 2 1 + tan h 2 x
HYPERBOLIC FUNCTION l cos h2x – sin h2x = 1
l sec h2x + tan h2x = 1
x x 2 x3
l ex = 1 + + + +… l cot h2x – cosec h2x = 1
1! 2! 3!
tan hx + tan hy
x x 2 x3 l tan h(x + y) =
l e–x = 1 − + − +… 1 + tan hx ⋅ tan hy
1! 2! 3!
e x − e− x tan hx − tan hy
l sin hx = l tan h(x – y) =
2 1 − tan hx ⋅ tan hy
e x + e− x cot hx ⋅ cot hy ± 1
l cos hx = l cot h(x ± y) =
2 cot hy ± cot hx
e x − e− x l sin h3x = 3 sin hx + 4 sin h3x
l tan hx =
e x + e− x l cos h3x = 4 cos h3x – 3 cos hx
Trigonometry 277

3tan hx + tan h3 x
l tan h3x =
1 + 3tan h 2 x

l sin h–1x = log x + { x2 + 1}

APPENDIX
l cos h–1 x = log { x + x − 1}
2

MATHEMATICAL SYMBOLS
1  1+ x 
l tan h–1x = log 
2  1 − x  Symbol Name Symbol Name
+ Plus aº a degree
1  x + 1
l cot h–1x = log  ∠
 x − 1
– Minus Angle
2
× Multiplication ∠ s Angles
1 + 1 − x 2  ÷ Division ⊥ Perpendicular
l sec h–1x = log   ± Plus or Minus ⊥s Perpendiculars
 x 
m Minus or plus // Parallel lines
1 + 1 + x 2  = Equal ∆ Triangle
l cosec h–1x = log   if x > 0 ≠ Not equal to ∆s Triangles
 x  : Ratio Square
:: Proportion Circle
1 − 1 + x 2 
= log   if x < 0 > Greater than π Diameter
 x  < Less than Circumference
¨ ≥ Greater than or equal to m Slope of a line
≤ Less than or equal to AB Line segment
() Parenthesis uuur between A and B
{} Braces AB Vector AB
[] Bracket (a, b) Open interval a < x < b
— Vinculum [a, b] Closed interval
~ Similarity a≤x<b
n
a' a minute (angle) ∑ Sum of n terms
1
a" a second (angle) α Alpha
Appendix 279 280 Advanced Dictionary of Mathematics Formulas

Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name

d tan–1 arc tangent cosec–1 arc cosec
β Beta Differentiation with cot–1 arc cotangent % percentage
dx respect to x
γ Gamma sec–1 arc sec |a| Absolute value of
real number a
δ Delta f (x) Function of x
λ Lemda ∫ Integration ABBREVIATION
κ Kappa arg z Argument of GCD Greatest Common Division
θ Theta amplitude LCD Least Common Divisor
GCM Greatest Common Multiple
φ Phi |z| Modulus of z
LCM Least Common Multiple
ω Omega z Conjugate of z
QED Quod Erat Demonstrandum
ξ Chi np
r Permutation of r CPCT Congruent Part of Congruent Triangle
µ Miu object out of n WRT With Respect To
ex Exponential x nc Combination of r
r ROMAN NUMERAL
log x Napier logarithm object out of n I=1 XXI=21 XLI=41 LXI=61 LXXXI=81 D=500
a α b a is directly e Base of natural II=2 XXII=22 XLII=42 LXII=62 LXXXII=82 M=1000
proportional to b logarithm III=3 XXIII=23 XLIII=43 LXIII=63 LXXXIII=83
IV=4 XXIV=24 XLIV=44 LXIV=64 LXXXIV=84
1 V=5 XXV=25 XLV=45 LXV=65 LXXXV=85
aα a is inversely I Identity matrix
b VI=6 XXVI=26 XLVI=46 LXVI=66 LXXXVI=86
proportional to b Square Root VII=7 XXVII=27 XLVII=47 LXVII=67 LXXXVII=87
n! n factorial 3 Cube Root VIII=8 XXVIII=28 XLVIII=48 LXVIII=68 LXXXVIII=88
IX=9 XXIX=29 XLIX=49 LXIX=69 LXXXIX=89
adj A Adjoint of matrix A (x)2 Square of x
X=10 XXX=30 L=50 LXX=70 XC=90
xRy x Related to y (x)3 Cube of x XI=11 XXXI=31 LI=51 LXXI=71 XCI=91
a' a prime sin Sine XII=12 XXXII=32 LII=52 LXXII=72 XCII=92
XIII=13 XXXIII=33 LIII=53 LXXIII=73 XCIII=93
a" a double prime cos Cosine
XIV=14 XXXIV=34 LIV= 54 LXXIV=74 XCIV=94
AT Transpose of matrix A tan Tangent XV=15 XXXV=35 LV=55 LXXV=75 XCV=95
A* Hermitian conjugate of cot Cotangent XVI=16 XXXVI=36 LVI=56 LXXVI=76 XCVI=96
matrix A sec Secant XVII=17 XXXVII=37 LVII=57 LXXVII=77 XCVII=97
XVIII=18 XXXVIII=38 LVIII=58 LXXVIII=78 XCVIII=98
Lim, Lt Limit cosec Cosecant XIX=19 XXXIX=39 LIX=59 LXXIX=79 XCIX=99
cos–1 arc cosine sin–1 arc sine XX=20 XL=40 LX=60 LXXX=80 C=100
 (I)

(II)

F=

C=
Appendix

9
9C + 160

5(F − 32)
5 mile = 8 km
1 km = 1000 g

9C = 5(F – 32)
1 feet = 12 inch
10 dm = 1 metre

1 Litre = 1000 ml

1 mile = 1.609 km
1 Pound = 16 Acre
1 Quintal = 100 kg

1 cm = 0.3937 inch

1 Acre = 4050 sq. m.

1 kg = 20205 pounds
10 dc = 1 hectometer

1 sq. feet = 144 sq. inch

10 m = 1 decameter (dc)

1 Metric ton = 10 Quintal

10 cm = 1 decimeter (dm)

1 sq. inch = 6.4516 sq. cm

10 mm = 1 centimeter (cm)

10 hectometer = 1 kilometer (km)

TEMPERATURE
METRIC SYSTEM
CONVERSION OF UNIT

1 Cubic Centimeter (cc) = 1000 Cubic kms

Relation between English and Metric System

¨
281

AREA UNDER THE NORMAL CURVE

z 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
0.0 0.0000 0.0040 0.0080 0.0120 0.0160 0.0199 0.0239 0.0279 0.0319 0.0359
0.1 0.0398 0.0438 0.0478 0.0517 0.0557 0.0596 0.0636 0.0675 0.0714 0.0753
0.2 0.0793 0.0832 0.0871 0.0910 0.0948 0.0987 0.1026 0.1064 0.1103 0.1141
0.3 0.1179 0.1217 0.1255 0.1293 0.1331 0.1368 0.1406 0.1443 0.1480 0.1517
0.4 0.1554 0.1591 0.1628 0.1664 0.1700 0.1736 0.1772 0.1808 0.1844 0.1879
0.5 0.1915 0.1950 0.1985 0.2019 0.2054 0.2088 0.2123 0.2157 0.2190 0.2224
0.6 0.2257 0.2291 0.2324 0.2357 0.2389 0.2422 0.2454 0.2486 0.2517 0.2549
0.7 0.2580 0.2611 0.2642 0.2673 0.2704 0.2734 0.2764 0.2794 0.2823 0.2852
0.8 0.2881 0.2910 0.2939 0.2967 0.2995 0.3023 0.3051 0.3078 0.3106 0.3133
0.9 0.3159 0.3186 0.3212 0.3238 0.3264 0.3289 0.3315 0.3340 0.3365 0.3389
1.0 0.3413 0.3438 0.3461 0.3485 0.3508 0.3531 0.3554 0.3577 0.3599 0.3621
1.1 0.3643 0.3665 0.3686 0.3708 0.3729 0.3749 0.3770 0.3790 0.3810 0.3830
1.2 0.3849 0.3869 0.3888 0.3907 0.3925 0.3944 0.3962 0.3980 0.3997 0.4015
1.3 0.4032 0.4049 0.4066 0.4082 0.4099 0.4115 0.4131 0.4147 0.4162 0.4177
1.4 0.4192 0.4207 0.4222 0.4236 0.4251 0.4265 0.4279 0.4292 0.4306 0.4319
Area Under The Normal Curve 283

0.4441
0.4545
0.4633
0.4706
0.4767
0.4817
0.4857
0.4890
0.4916
0.4936
0.4952
0.4964
0.4974
0.4981
0.4986
0.4990

¨
LOGARITHMS TABLE
TABLE I
0.4429
0.4535
0.4625
0.4699
0.4761
0.4812
0.4854
0.4887
0.4913
0.4934
0.4951
0.4963
0.4973
0.4980
0.4986
0.4990
N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 0000 0043 0086 0128 0170 5 9 13 17 21 26 30 34 38
0212 0253 0294 0334 0374 4 8 12 16 2O 24 28 32 36
0.4418
0.4525
0.4616
0.4693
0.4756
0.4808
0.4850
0.4884

0.4932
0.4949
0.4962
0.4972
0.4979
0.4985
0.4989
0.4911
11 0414 0453 0492 0531 0569 4 8 12 16 20 23 27 31 35
0607 0645 0682 0719 0755 4 7 11 15 18 22 26 29 33

12 0792 0828 0864 0899 0934 3 7 11 14 18 21 25 28 32

0969 1004 1038 1072 1106 3 7 10 14 17 20 24 27 31
13 1139 1173 1206 1239 1271 3 6 10 13 16 19 23 26 29
1303 1335 1367 1399 1430 3 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 29
0.4406
0.4515
0.4608
0.4686
0.4750
0.4803
0.4846
0.4881
0.4909
0.4931
0.4948
0.4961
0.4971
0.4979
0.4985
0.4989
14 1461 1492 1523 1553 1584 3 6 9 12 15 19 22 25 28
1614 1644 1673 1703 1732 3 6 9 12 14 17 20 23 26
15 1761 1790 1818 1847 1875 3 6 9 11 14 17 20 23 26
1903 1931 1959 1987 2014 3 6 8 11 14 17 19 22 25
16 2041 2068 2095 2122 2148 3 6 8 11 14 16 19 22 24
2175 2201 2227 2253 2279 3 5 8 10 13 16 18 21 23
0.4394
0.4505
0.4599
0.4678
0.4744
0.4798
0.4842
0.4878
0.4906
0.4929
0.4946
0.4960
0.4970
0.4978
0.4984
0.4989
17 2304 2330 2355 2380 2405 3 5 8 10 13 15 18 20 23
2430 2455 2480 2504 2529 3 5 8 10 12 15 17 20 22
18 2553 2577 2601 2625 2648 2 5 7 9 12 14 17 19 21
2672 2695 2718 2742 2765 2 4 7 9 11 14 16 18 21
19 2788 2810 2833 2856 2878 2 4 7 9 11 13 16 18 20
2900 2923 2945 2967 2989 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 19
0.4382
0.4495
0.4591
0.4671
0.4738
0.4793
0.4838
0.4875
0.4904
0.4927
0.4945
0.4959
0.4969
0.4977
0.4984
0.4988
20 3010 3032 3054 3075 3096 3118 3139 3160 3181 3201 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 19
21 3222 3243 3263 3284 3304 3324 3345 3365 3385 3404 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
22 3424 3444 3464 3483 3502 3522 3541 3560 3579 3598 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 17
23 3617 3636 3655 3674 3692 3711 3729 3747 3766 3784 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 17
24 3802 3820 3838 3856 3874 3892 3909 3927 3945 3962 2 4 5 7 9 11 12 14 16
0.4370
0.4484
0.4582
0.4664
0.4732
0.4788
0.4834
0.4871
0.4901
0.4925
0.4943
0.4957
0.4968
0.4977
0.4983
0.4988

25 3979 3997 4014 4031 4048 4065 4082 4099 4116 4133 2 3 5 7 9 10 12 14 15
26 4150 4166 4183 4200 4216 4232 4249 4265 4281 4298 2 3 5 7 8 10 11 13 15
27 4314 4330 4346 4362 4378 4393 4409 4425 4440 4456 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 13 14
28 4472 4487 4502 4518 4533 4548 4564 4579 4594 4609 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14
29 4624 4639 4654 4669 4683 4698 4713 4728 4742 4757 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13

30 4771 4786 4800 4814 4829 4843 4857 4871 4886 4900 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 13
0.4357
0.4474
0.4573
0.4656
0.4726
0.4783
0.4830
0.4868
0.4898
0.4922
0.4941
0.4956
0.4967
0.4976
0.4982
0.4987

31 4914 4928 4942 4955 4969 4983 4997 5011 5024 5038 1 3 4 6 7 8 10 11 12
32 5051 5065 5079 5092 5105 5119 5132 5145 5159 5172 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 12
33 5185 5198 5211 5224 5237 5250 5263 5276 5289 5302 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12
34 5315 5328 5340 5353 5366 5378 5391 5403 5416 5428 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11

35 5441 5453 5465 5478 5490 5502 5514 5527 5539 5551 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
0.4345
0.4463
0.4564
0.4649
0.4719
0.4778
0.4826
0.4864
0.4896
0.4920
0.4940
0.4955
0.4966
0.4975
0.4982
0.4987

36 5563 5575 5587 5599 5611 5623 5635 5647 5658 5670 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 11
37 5682 5694 5705 5717 5729 5740 5752 5763 5775 5786 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
38 5798 5809 5821 5832 5843 5855 5866 5877 5888 5899 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
39 5911 5922 5933 5944 5955 5966 5977 5988 5999 6010 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10

40 6021 6031 6042 6053 6064 6075 6085 6096 6107 6117 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
0.4332
0.4452
0.4554
0.4641
0.4713
0.4772
0.4821
0.4861
0.4893
0.4918
0.4938
0.4953
0.4965
0.4974
0.4981
0.4987

41 6128 6138 6149 6160 6170 6180 6191 6201 6212 6222 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
42 6232 6243 6253 6263 6274 6284 6294 6304 6314 6325 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
43 6335 6345 6355 6365 6375 6385 6395 6405 6415 6425 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
44 6435 6444 6454 6464 6474 6484 6493 6503 6513 6522 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
To index

45 6532 6542 6551 6561 6471 6580 6590 6599 6609 6618 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
46 6628 6637 6646 6656 6665 6675 6684 6693 6702 6712 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0

47 6721 6730 6739 6749 6758 6767 6776 6785 6794 6803 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8
Log Table 285

N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
48 6812 6821 6830 6839 6848 6857 6866 6875 6884 6893
7 8 9 1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
8
ANTILOGARITHMS
49 6902 6911 6920 6928 6937 6946 6955 6964 6972 6981 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8

50 6990 6998 7007 7016 7024 7033 7042 7050 7059 7067 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 TABLE II
51 7076 7084 7093 7101 7110 7118 7126 7135 7143 7152 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8
52 7160 7168 7177 7185 7193 7202 7210 7218 7226 7235 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 7
N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
53 7243 7251 7259 7267 7275 7284 7292 7300 7308 7316 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7
54 7324 7332 7340 7348 7356 7364 7372 7380 7388 7396 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 00 1000 1002 1005 1007 1009 1012 1014 1016 1019 1021 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
.01 1023 1026 1028 1030 1033 1035 1038 1040 1042 1045 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
55 7404 7412 7419 7427 7435 7443 7451 7459 7466 7474 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 .02 1047 1050 1052 1054 1057 1059 1062 1064 1067 1069 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
56 7482 7490 7497 7505 7513 7520 7528 7536 7543 7551 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 .03 1072 1074 1076 1079 1081 1084 1086 1089 1091 1094 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
57 7559 7566 7574 7582 7589 7597 7604 7612 7619 7627 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 .04 1096 1099 1102 1104 1107 1109 1112 1114 1117 1119 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
58 7634 7642 7649 7657 7664 7672 7679 7686 7694 7701 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 .05 1122 1125 1127 1130 1132 1135 1138 1140 1143 1146 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
59 7709 7716 7723 7731 7738 7745 7752 7760 7767 7774 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 .06 1148 1151 1153 1156 1159 1161 1164 1167 1169 1172 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
.07 1175 1178 1180 1183 1186 1189 1191 1194 1197 1199 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
60 7782 7789 7796 7803 7810 7818 7825 7832 7839 7846 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6
.08 1202 1205 1208 1211 1213 1216 1219 1222 1225 1227 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
61 7853 7860 7768 7875 7882 7889 7896 7903 7910 7917 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6
.09 1230 1233 1236 1239 1242 1245 1247 1250 1253 1256 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
62 7924 7931 7938 7945 7952 7959 7966 7973 7980 7987 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6
63 7993 8000 8007 8014 8021 8028 8035 8041 8048 8055 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6
64 8062 8069 8075 8082 8089 8096 8102 8109 8116 8122 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 .10 1259 1262 1265 1268 1271 1274 1276 1279 1282 1285 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
.11 1288 1291 1294 1297 1300 1303 1306 1309 1312 1315 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3
65 8129 8136 8142 8149 8156 8162 8169 8176 8182 8189 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 .12 1318 1321 1324 1327 1330 1334 1337 1340 1343 1346 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3
66 8195 8202 8209 8215 8222 8228 8235 8241 8248 8254 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 .13 1349 1352 1355 1358 1361 1365 1368 1371 1374 1377 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
67 8261 8267 8274 8280 8287 8293 8299 8306 8312 8319 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 .14 1380 1384 1387 1390 1393 1396 1400 1403 1406 1409 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
68 8325 8331 8338 8344 8351 8357 8363 8370 8376 8382 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 .15 1413 1416 1419 1422 1426 1429 1432 1435 1439 1442 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
69 8388 8395 8401 8407 8414 8420 8426 8432 8439 8445 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 .16 1445 1449 1452 1455 1459 1462 1466 1469 1472 1476 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
.17 1479 1483 1486 1489 1493 1496 1500 1503 1507 1510 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
70 8451 8457 8463 8470 8476 8482 8488 8494 8500 8506 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 .18 1514 1517 1521 1524 1528 1531 1535 1538 1542 1545 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
71 8513 8519 8525 8531 8537 8543 8549 8555 8561 8567 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 .19 1549 1552 1556 1560 1563 1567 1570 1574 1578 1581 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3
72 8573 8579 8585 8591 8597 8603 8609 8615 8621 8627 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5
73 8633 8639 8645 8651 8657 8663 8669 8675 8681 8686 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5
.20 1585 1589 1592 1596 1600 1603 1607 1611 1614 1618 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3
74 8692 8698 8704 8710 8716 8722 8727 8733 8739 8745 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5
.21 1622 1626 1629 1633 1637 1641 1644 1648 1652 1656 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
.22 1660 1663 1667 1671 1675 1679 1683 1687 1690 1694 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
75 8751 8756 8762 8768 8774 8779 8785 8791 8797 8802 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5
76 8808 8814 8820 8825 8831 8837 8842 8848 8854 8859 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 .23 1698 1702 1706 1710 1714 1718 1722 1726 1730 1734 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4
77 8865 8871 8876 8882 8887 8893 8899 8904 8910 8915 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .24 1738 1742 1746 1750 1754 1758 1762 1766 1770 1774 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4
78 8921 8927 8932 8938 8943 8949 8954 8960 8965 8971 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .25 1778 1782 1786 1791 1795 1799 1803 1807 1811 1816 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4
79 8976 8982 8987 8993 8998 9004 9009 9015 9020 9025 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .26 1820 1824 1828 1832 1837 1841 1845 1849 1854 1858 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4
.27 1862 1866 1871 1875 1879 1884 1888 1892 1897 1901 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4
80 9031 9036 9042 9047 9053 9058 9063 9069 9074 9079 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .28 1905 1910 1914 1919 1923 1928 1932 1936 1941 1945 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
81 9085 9090 9096 9101 9106 9112 9117 9122 9128 9133 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .29 1950 1954 1959 1963 1968 1972 1977 1982 1986 1991 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
82 9138 9143 9149 9154 9159 9165 9170 9175 9180 9186 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
83 9191 9196 9201 9206 9212 9217 9222 9227 9232 9238 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .30 1995 2000 2004 2009 2014 2018 2023 2028 2032 2037 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
84 9243 9248 9253 9258 9263 9269 9274 9279 9284 9289 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .31 2042 2046 2051 2056 2061 2065 2070 2075 2080 2084 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
.32 2089 2094 2099 2104 2109 2113 2118 2123 2128 2133 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
85 9294 9299 9304 9309 9315 9320 9325 9330 9335 9340 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 .33 2138 2143 2148 2153 2158 2163 2168 2173 2178 2183 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
86 9345 9350 9355 9360 9365 9370 9375 9380 9385 9390 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
.34 2188 2193 2198 2203 2208 2213 2218 2223 2228 2234 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
87 9395 9400 9405 9410 9415 9420 9425 9430 9435 9440 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
.35 2239 2244 2249 2254 2259 2265 2270 2275 2280 2286 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
88 9445 9450 9455 9460 9465 9469 9474 9479 9484 9489 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
.36 2291 2296 2301 2307 2312 2317 2323 2328 2333 2339 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
89 9494 9499 9504 9509 9513 9518 9523 9528 9533 9538 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
.37 2344 2350 2355 2360 2366 2371 2377 2382 2388 2393 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
90 9542 9547 9552 9557 9562 9566 9571 9576 9581 9586 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .38 2399 2404 2410 2415 2421 2427 2432 2438 2443 2449 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5
91 9590 9595 9600 9605 9609 9614 9619 9624 9628 9633 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .39 2455 2460 2466 2472 2477 2483 2489 2495 2500 2506 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5
92 9638 9643 9647 9652 9657 9661 9666 9671 9675 9680 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
93 9685 9689 9694 9699 9703 9708 9713 9717 9722 9727 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .40 2512 2518 2523 2529 2535 2541 2547 2553 2559 2564 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5
94 9731 9736 9741 9745 9750 9754 9759 9763 9768 9773 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .41 2570 2576 2582 2588 2594 2600 2606 2612 2618 2624 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5
.42 2630 2636 2642 2649 2655 2661 2667 2673 2679 2685 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6
95 9777 9782 9786 9791 9795 9800 9805 9809 9814 9818 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .43 2692 2698 2704 2710 2716 2723 2729 2735 2742 2748 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6
96 9823 9827 9832 9836 9841 9845 9850 9854 9859 9863 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .44 2754 2761 2767 2773 2780 2786 2793 2799 2805 2812 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 6
97 9868 9872 9877 9881 9886 9890 9894 9899 9903 9908 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .45 2818 2825 2831 2838 2844 2851 2858 2864 2871 2877 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6
98 9912 9917 9921 9926 9930 9934 9939 9943 9948 9952 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 .46 2884 2891 2897 2904 2911 2917 2924 2931 2938 2944 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6
99 9956 9961 9965 9969 9974 9978 9983 9987 9997 9996 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4
Log Table 287

N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.47 2951 2958 2965 2972 2979 2985 2992 2999 3006 3013 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6
.48 3020 3027 3034 3041 3048 3055 3062 3069 3076 3083 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6
.49 3090 3097 3105 3112 3119 3126 3133 3141 3148 3155 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6

.50 3162 3170 3177 3184 3192 3199 3206 3214 3221 3228 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7
.51 3236 3243 3251 3258 3266 3273 3281 3289 3296 3304 1 2 2 3 4 5 5 6 7
.52
.53
.54
3311
3388
3467
3319
3396
3475
3327
3404
3483
3334
3412
3491
3342
3420
3499
3350
3428
3508
3357
3436
3516
3365
3443
3524
3373
3451
3532
3381
3459
3540
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
BIBLIOGRAPHY
.55 3548 3556 3565 3573 3581 3589 3597 3606 3614 3622 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 7
.56 3631 3639 3648 3656 3664 3673 3681 3690 3698 3707 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8
.57 3715 3724 3733 3741 3750 3758 3767 3776 3784 3793 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8
.58 3802 3811 3819 3828 3837 3846 3855 3864 3873 3882 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 v NCERT Textbook (6 to 12)
.59 3890 3899 3908 3917 3926 3936 3945 3954 3963 3972 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8
v Textbook of Mathematics (ICSE/ISC Board)
.60 3981 3990 3999 4009 4018 4027 4036 4046 4055 4064 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8
.61 4074 4083 4093 4102 4111 4121 4130 4140 4150 4159 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 v High School Geometry—Halls & Stevin
.62 4169 4178 4188 4198 4207 4217 4227 4236 4246 42S6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.63
.64
4266
4365
4276
4375
4285
4385
4295
4395
4305
4406
4315
4416
4325
4426
4335
4436
4345
4446
4355
4457
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
v Higher Algebra—Halls & Knight
.65 4467 4477 4487 4498 4508 4519 4529 4539 4550 4560 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.66 4571 4581 4592 4603 4613 4624 4634 4645 4656 4667 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
v Integral Calculus—M.L. Khanna
.67 4677 4688 4699 4710 4721 4732 4742 4753 4764 4775 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
.68 4786 4797 4808 4819 4831 4842 4853 4864 4875 4887 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 v Calculus—K.C. Sinha
.69 4898 4909 4920 4932 4943 4955 4966 4977 4989 5000 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
v Objective Mathematics—Dr. R.D. Sharma
.70 5012 5023 5035 5047 5058 5070 5082 5093 5105 5117 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 11
.71 5129 5140 5152 5164 5176 5188 5200 5212 5224 5236 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 v Dictionary of Mathematics—Prof. V.P. Jaggi
.72 5248 5260 5272 5284 5297 5309 5321 5333 5346 5358 1 2 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
.73 5370 5383 5395 5408 5420 5433 5445 5458 5470 5483 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 v Dictionary of Mathematics—James & James
.74 5495 5508 5521 5534 5546 5559 5572 5585 5598 5610 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12
.75
.76
5623
5754
5636
5768
5649
5781
5662
5794
5675
5808
5689
5821
5702
5834
5715
5848
5728
5861
5741
5875
1
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
12
v Dictionary of Mathematics—E.J. Borowski
.77 5888 5902 5916 5929 5943 5957 5970 5984 5998 6012 1 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12
.78 6026 6039 6053 6067 6081 6095 6109 6124 6138 6152 1 3 4 6 7 8 10 11 13
J.M. Borwein
.79 6166 6180 6194 6209 6223 6237 6252 6266 6281 6295 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 13
J.F. Bowers
.80 6310 6324 6339 6353 6368 6383 6397 6412 6427 6442 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13
.81 6457 6471 6486 6501 6516 6531 6546 6561 6577 6592 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14 A. Robertson
.82 6607 6622 6637 6653 6668 6683 6699 6714 6730 6745 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 14
.83 6761 6776 6792 6808 6823 6839 6855 6871 6887 6902 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 13 14 M. Macquillian
.84 6918 6934 6950 6966 6982 6998 7015 7031 7047 7063 2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 15
.85 7079 7096 7112 7129 7145 7161 7178 7194 7211 7228 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 15 v Text Books of Mathematics (6 to 12)—Rajasthan Board.
.86 7244 7261 7278 7295 7311 7328 7345 7362 7379 7396 2 3 5 7 8 10 12 13 15
.87 7413 7430 7447 7464 7482 7499 7516 7534 7551 7568 2 3 5 7 9 10 12 14 16 v Text Books of Mathematics (6 to 12)—Haryana Board.
.88 7586 7603 7621 7638 7656 7674 7691 7709 7727 7745 2 4 5 7 9 11 12 14 16
.89 7762 7780 7798 7816 7834 7852 7870 7889 7907 7925 2 4 5 7 9 11 13 14 16
v Illustrated Dictionary—J.D. Klerk.
.90 7943 7962 7980 7998 8017 8035 8054 8072 8091 8110 2 4 6 7 9 11 13 15 17
.91 8128 8147 8166 8185 8204 8222 8241 8260 8279 8299 2 4 6 8 9 11 13 15 17
v The Facts on File Dictionary of Mathematics—John Daintith
.92 8318 8337 8356 8375 8395 8414 8433 8453 8472 8492 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 17
.93 8511 8531 8551 8570 8590 8610 8630 8650 8670 8690 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
.94
.95
8710
8913
8730
8933
8750
8954
8770
8974
8790
8995
8810
9016
8831
9036
8851
9057
8872
9078
8892
9099
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
10
10
12
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
¨¨¨
.96 9120 9141 9162 9183 9204 9226 9247 9268 9290 9311 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 19
.97 9333 9354 9376 9397 9419 9441 9462 9484 9506 9528 2 4 7 9 11 13 15 17 20
.98 9550 9572 9594 9616 9638 9661 9683 9705 9727 9750 2 4 7 9 11 13 16 18 20
.99 9772 9795 9817 9840 9863 9886 9908 9931 9954 9977 2 5 7 9 11 14 16 18 20